-T imam G>indhnth &han,cSli M. & EDITOR, PUNJAB UNIVERSITY PUBLICATION BUREAU, JULIUNOUR. 'I I
EDITOR, PUNJAB UNIVERSITY II ^HPUBL,CATI0N BUREAU, JULLUNDURt
PANJAB UNlVERSITYloftlENf ALbubLICATiONS, No.lli
A PHONOLOGlYl OFllPANJ ABI AS SPOKENlABOUTlLUDHIANA AND A LUDHIAINilPHOINETIClREADER (With (^Preface from\l)v.\T. G.jBAILEY)
B1H5I T BY IF I I^H BANARSI DAS JAIN M.A. ( Pa nj.), Ph. D. ( Lond.) LECTURER IN IHINDI. ORIENTAL COLLEGE! LAHORE
[Thesis approved by the University of London for the degree of jj£ [ l^Doctor\of\Philosophy[(1926)] \ \
PUBLISHED! BY THE [UNIVERSITY] OF THE PANJAB LAiHlOR E 1934 <
i
Printed by G. D. Thukral, at the Mercantile Press, Lahore.
i t c I S c t
I irnnm CPingh Qj/iaWf ACiS, EDITOR. PUNJAB UNIVERSITT PUBLICATION BUREAU. JULlUNDUR,
PREFACE. The present volume is virtually an embodiment in print of my thesis entitled "The Phonology of Panjabi as spoken about Ludhiana" which was accepted by the University of London in 1926J:or the degree of Doctor of Philosophy. The work consists of two parts: the first deals with Phonology proper and the second is a Phonetic Reader of the Ludhiani dialect which won me the Laura Soames Prize at the University College, London. My interest for the subject goes as far back as 1913 when I was. studying for my M.A.jn Sanskrit. During these days the Panjab University awarded me the Mayo-Patiala Research Studentship for a phonetic analysis of my mother-tongue. In. 1919 I was deputed the.task of compiling a Dictionary of the Panjabi language, in which capacity I had to ransack nearly the whole of the Panjabf literature, as also to amass a Targe amount of material from the lips of Panjabi speakers. While the dictionary was in the making I sailed for England to prose cute studies in Indian Philology. There in London I studied Philology with Prof. R. L. Turner at the School of Oriental Studies, and Phonetics, with Prof. Daniel Jones at the University College. The present book is the result of my labour of two years that I spent there. Some of the special features of my thesis are: 1. The discovery of the Law of Accent-shift in the central languages, Hindi, Panjabi, Gujarat! and Rajasthanl (§§ 10—12,181—91). By its help have been explained such forms as seemed irregular hitherto.
0 2. History of the Primitive Indian long vowels before consonant groups (§§ 16—25). 3. It defines the limits of the period in which the Annsvara, the parent of the so-called "Spontaneous Nasalisation" was inserted (§ 113). 4. it explains the derivation of a number of words that seemed strange and doubtful before.
\ IV 5. It affords new strength to the, regularity with which the phonetic laws work in a language. p 6. It contains a^numiier of minute phonetic observations. The thesis was accepted for inclusion in the PanjaKUniversity Oriental Publications early in 1927. But the actual printing had to be put off for want'of phonetic type in India, till 1931 when special founts were cast by the Mercantile. Press, Lahore*. But then sprung, up* another.,-impediment: I was,medically-* advised not to strain my eyes. Consequently the work of proof-reading was protracted as it had to be done by my friends—Messrs. Raghtmandan Shastri, M.A , M.O.L., and Har Dev Bahri, M.A., M.O.L. to whom I am much indebted. In the end comes the most pleasant duty—that* of thanking my, benevolent teacher, Principal A.C.Wbolner without whose kind and generous guidance I would never have been what I am. Ever since I in contact with him, he has always been f inspiration to me, and the present work is a, visualisa- tioib of the enthusiasm, for Philology he invoked • I cannot close this preface without thanking Prof. R.L, Turner and Prof. D. Jones, and his colleagues who gave me help and advice infringing my thesis to its present form. Oriental College, Lahore. BANARSI DAS JAIN. 13th December. 1933.
•*\ CONTENTS.
PREFACE INTRODUCTION ^^^^ Area where Panjabi is spoken—§ 1 Two main forms—ordinary Panj. and Dogri—§ 2 Panj. Literature —§§ 3—5 — | | J — £-| I General position of Panj.—§ 6 Ludhiani compared with Majhi—§ 7. DEFINITIONS-^ 8 _ __ PHONOLOGICAL CHANGES -§ 9 ACCENT, (stress, and pitch)-§§ 10—12 VOWEL CHANGES: Vowel-changes in accented.syllables—§§ 14—15 Vowels in closed syllables—§§ 16—25 Unexplained changes in accented vowels—§§ 26—40 Vowels in unaccented syllables Treatment of the final syllable—§§ 41—50 Vowels in non-final (unaccented) syllable * i, Pre-accentual—§§ 51—63 Post-accentual—§§ 64—67 Effects of h on vowels—§§ 68—78 I Tonic effects of h on vowels §§99 History of the discovery of tones in Panjabi Treatment of r (3E) — §§ 94—99 Vowels in contact—§§ 100—103 Panjabi Diphthongs—§§ 104—106 Vowel-gradation §§107-110 . Nasal Vowels in Panjabi—§§ 111—116 I Denasalisation—§§ 117—119 I CONSONANTS-General—§§120-22 J ASPIRATION-§§ 123—132 ^^ DBS ASPIRATION—§§ 133—36 _ PI SINGLE CONSONANTS—§ 137 Initial Stops—§-137 __ VI Intervocalic stops —•§ 138 Initial Nasals—§ 139 Intervocalic nasals—§ 140 Initial y-, v- § 141 ] Intervocalic -y- -v—§ 142 r, 1-* 143 Initial &-, §-, s~—§ 144 Intervocalic -3-, -§-, -s—§ 145 Initial h—§ 146 ^ Intervocalic -h—§ 147 CONSONANTS IN CONTACT—§§ 148-151 „ Stop+Stop (Homorganic) —§ 152 Stop+Stop (Heterorganic)—§ 153 Stop+Nasal—§ 154^ Nasal-f Stop—§§ 155—56 Nasal+Nasal—§ 157 Double Nasals—§ 158 Nasal+Semi-vowel—§ 159 Nasal+Sibilants—§ 160 Groups with~y—§ 161 Groups with r—§ 162 r+consonant—§ 1631 j Groups :>with 1—§ 164 Groups with v—§ 165 Groups with a sibilant (Sibilant+stop)—§ 166 Groups with a sibilant (Stop-f-sibilant)—§ 167 Groups with h—§ 168 CEREBRALISATION—§ 169 -71_ SVARABHAKTI-H 172—174 INSERTION OF PLOSIVES—§jl75 INSERTION OF r—§ 176 ^^^ DOUBLING OF PI intervocalic stops—§ 177 METATHESIS—§ 178^ CONTAMINATION—$ 179 ONOMATOPOESIS—$ 180 • • Vll SHIFT OF STRESS-ACCENT—§§ 181—87 L I •—[ 93 INDEX OF PANJABl (Ludhiani) words _ — 101 INDEX OF SANSKRIT words . I I 1 __ M_ 137 ^H 1 II PART II. LUDHIANI PHONETIC READER. Preface from Dr. T. G.fBaileyl 153 INTRODUCTION 155 Ludhiani VOWELS 156 Notes on the Ludhiani VOWELS 157 Ludhiani DIPHTHONGS 159 Ludhiani CONSONANTS | J 160 Plosives 162 Affricates ^^^ 162 Nasals 162 Lateral 163 Rolled and flapped 163 Fricatives 1 163 ASSIMILATIONT 164 STRESS j 165 LENGTH 166 TONES JH 167 JtfOTES ON LUDHIANI TONES 169 INTONATION _„„ | 169 Additional notes on Ludhiani soundsl 171 Chief difficulties experienced by English speakers in learning Ludhiani and vice versa 173 Length (supplementary) 173 RHYTHM ^^^^ ^^^^^^176^ TEXTS— — — H ](Por a list ofltexts see p. 177) VOCABULARY L —11 —11 —.1215 I
I V*
m >••*#•• I
*>
: I n 4
yt ./ AT-TV • t • rnr.
•
«•* - | \ *, i/ *..*
^ • »-
Bfc -J '«• lli U
**• TTdX I « \ * J • ' *
\j * t<* • f •*
V
• •
••* I' / I J r J
ri : / .T <••;• V. fX.f - A .4 i / *\ PHONOLOGY OF PANJABI
AS SPOKEN ABOUT LUDHIANA. Introduction1. §1. The dialect which? forms the subject of this thesis is spoken at and about the town of Ludhiana with a few class differences, and goes under the common name of Panjabi. literally speaking the term Panjabi denotes the language of the Pan jab, "the land of the five rivers."8 This area, however, does not coverthe whole of Panjabi, nor is Panjabi the language of the whole of this area. To the east it is spoken much beyond the Sutlej, while in the west it is not spoken in great parts of the Barf, Bachna and Chaj Doabs.8 The political extension of the province brought within its boundaries all the speakers of Panjabi to the east, but included also speakers of yet other dialects.4 Hence it is not strictly logical to say that Panjabi is the language of the Pan jab. §2. Sir George A. Grierson has restricted the term for dialects spoken over a fairly well-defined area. He distinguishes two main forms of the speech—the ordinary Panjabi and Dogri. The ordinary Panjabi has two standard dialects. The one re cognised by the people themselves is Majhi spoken in the districts of Lahore and Amritsar which is considered'to be the purest
(1J For general history of Indo-Aryan speech in India, see J. Bloeh: La Formation de la Langue Marathi §§ 1—26. (2) Hobson Jobson: s. v. "Punjaab". (3) L. S. I. IX1 p. 608. I (4) Mr. H. A. Rose in his " Contributions to Panjabi Lexico graphy": Indian Antiquary 1908 pp. 360 etc. treats Panjabi as the language of the Panjab and includes in it Lahndi, Pahari" BSgaru etc, .£ ^ 2 form of the language. This judgment of the people is in keeping with the fact that the Main area has remained the seat of f The other standard is that developed by the Christian missionaries' who first settled at Ludhiana and became familiar with the dialect spoken there1. This has not given rise to any great native literature.2 §3. Literature3. The Adi-Granth is supposed to represent the earliest document written in the Panjabi language. But as a matter of fact it is a conglomeration of Indian dialects somewhat distorted by its redactors. About Jayadeva's Bengali hymns appearing in the Granth, Dr. S. K. Chatterjee remarks that their
l.L. S. I. IX1 p. 609. _. • s " i 2. Pt. Sardha Ram, the"writer of the famous books "Sikkha de Raj dl Vithea" and "Panjabi Bat-Cit" belonged to Phillour, seven or eight miles north of Ludhiana, but he did not wrrite in the pure form of his native tongue. 1 3. Nothing in English has yet been written about Panjabi literature, except the information contained in the following books. • . (t) E. Trumpp: "The Adi Granth, or the Holy Scriptures of the Sikhs, translated from the Original Gurmnkhi with Introductory Essays." London, 1877. \: (ii) IT. T. Thornton. "Vernacular Literature and Folklore of the Panjab." J. R. A. S. (Vol. XVII)) 1885 pp. 373 if.; „ (Hi), M. A. Macauliffe: ''The Sikh Religion, its Gurus, Sacred Writing and Authors.'' 6 vols. Oxford 1909. (ii;) R. C. Temple: " The Legends of the Panjab." Bombay and London Vol. I (1884), Vol. II (1885) and Vol. Ill (1900). (v) C. Swynnerton: "Romantic Tales from the Panjab, collected and edited from various sources." London, 1903. (ri) G. A. Grierson: Bibliography given in L. S. I. IX1 pp. 619—24. 4 (vii) Quarterly lists of the books printed in the Panjab, issued by the Panjab Government as supplements to the Panjab iGDvernment Gazette. ' (viii) J. P. Blumhardt: "Catalogues of the Hindi, Panjabi, Sindhi and^Pashtu Printed Books in the Library of the British Museum.'' London 1893.. (ix) J. F. Blumhardt: "Catalogue of the Library of' the India Office", Vol. II, part III. Hindi, Panjabi, Pashtu- and Sindhi Books, London 1902, 3
garb has been so much changed that they have hardly left any trace of their Bengali origin. The chief among the dialects represented in the Granth is the Braj Bhasa. Only a small portion of the work can claim to be called Panjabi as based on the spoken language. A good example of this is Japji, the opening verses of the Granth.
The Mohammadans were the first cultivators of Panjabi literature as based on the popular speech chiefly of the Gujrat and Gujranwala. districts. The Hindus looked for their poetical inspiration to Braj or, sometimes, to the language of Tulsi Ramayana, and hence a mixed dialect of Braj and Panjabi was the result. Quite a large literature exists in this mixed language, a good deal of which is still unpublished. It is used up to the day by Sikh preachers at Amritsar and elsewhere. A similar mixture of Braj. and Bengali, called Brajaboli, was used by the Vaisnava poets of Bengal.1 4. The Mohammadans who had been recently converted had nothing to fall back upon except their own vernacular;< hence arose a considerable literature in the spoken dialect dealing with various topics of the Muslim religion. Mention may be made of a Jang-nama, describing the battle between "the Imam Hasan and
I f • \x) H. v. Glasenapp: Die Literaturen Indiens von Ihren Anfangen bis zur Gegenwart: Leipzig 1929. [ In vernacular, however, a good beginning has been made by Bawa Budh Singh who brought out his "Hans Cog" (Wazir i-Hind Press Amritsar 1914) and " Koil ku" (Mufid-i-Am Press, Lahore 1916) in Panjabi (Gurmukhi). Besides these,. PirS Ditta's edition of "Hir Waris shah" (Lahore 1918) contains a useful introduction (Urdu) on the literature about Hir. Maula Bakhsh Kushta cf Amritsar, also, has given a brief survey of Panjabi literature as an apnendix in the edition of his Hir (Urdu). .,; (1) D. C. Sen: "History of Bengali Language and Literature" : . Calcutta 1911, p. 387. Yazid, written by Muqbil1 about 200 years ago. Older than Muqbil is Baba Farid2. His couplets are in a form of Lahndi, but those found in the Adi Granth under his name are almost free from Lahndisms. Apart? from the religious use, the vernacular was also nsed for national and tribal ballads— Puran, Rasalu, Hir, Sassi, Haqiqat etc. §5 Here it will be interesting to noint out that like Hindustan literary Panjabi, also, has two varieties, which may be called Persian-Panjabi and Gurmukhi-Panjabi. They differ from each other exactly as Urdu does from Hindi, viz., in script, vocabulary, metres, similes, sources for subjects, and a few points of construc tion and grammar8. §6 The general position of Panjabi among the Aryan languages of India is between western Hindi and Lahndi The important features which distinguish it from either, or are shared by it in common with one of the two have been summed up by Sir George Grierson in L. S. I. IX* pp. 615-17. \ §7. To distinguish the dialect examined here from other dialects of Panjabi, I shall call it Ludhiani. The following points may be noted in which it differs from i, the popular standard dialect d) So far as my speech may be taken to represent Ludhiani, it does not distinguish between dental and cerebral
(1) Lithographed in Persian characters, Lahore 1877. Numerous editions have appeared since. Another poem by the same called " Hir" was edited by 'me and published by the Pan jab University, Lahore 1921. (2) Gulzar or Israr-i-Faridi. Lithographed, Lahore or Multan? (3) Lately the Panjab University has felt the need of in stituting two different sets of examinations fori these varieties of Panjabi. n and 1. With the modifications described Sunder Phonetics, all its n and 1 are alveolar. According to Sir George Grierson Majhi, too,* does not distinguish between, 1 and J1 but a few miles away from Lahore the distinction is very prominent.* (it) The reduction of the intervocalic h to tones is not so common in Ludhiani as it is in Majhi, thus Lahaur, Luhari, Kahani, rahi pronounced with h in Ludhiani are pronounced with tones in Majhi as [lcAor, lucari, kconi. rdi]. (in) Ludhiani does not possess initial v- as Malwai and Majhi do. (iv) Ludhiani has a greater tendency to double intervocalic consonants than Majhi has. L. S. I. IX' p. 651. Compare the doubling tendency of vernacular Hindustani of Saharanpur, Meerut and Muzaffarnagar districts. L. S. I IX1 p. .213. (v): Majhi often pronounces a vowel in a low tone after an initial r; e. g. Earn, r5tti, RanS, become Rhara [rcQ :m], rhotti [rcoti], Rha^d" [rcano] in Majhi.* (vi) Ludhiani does not use the double tone so frequently as the dialect of Wazirabad. Ludh. (JhidaV bhabbi, but Wazirabadi dhid (1) Sir George's argument that Dulhan Darpan, written in the purest form cf the Majh, does not contain a single cerebral I from cover to cover" ,(L. S. I. IX' p. 609) may only be a matter cf printing. Maya Singh's Dictionary (Lahore 1895), also does not distinguish between 1 and },. while the Ludhiana Dictionary (1854) on which it is based, distin guishes them very carefully. (2) Dr. Bailey : "Panjabi Manual", and "Panjabi Phonetic Reader". : ; (3) Personal observation for Lahore; Bailey's Panjabi Manual for Wazirabad. (4) Panjabi Phonetic Reader p. xv. (5) L. S. I. VHP p. 324. / « t ••- (viii) The PI groups! tr dr are heard in Majhi while in Ludhiani tney have: been assimilated. Lud'.i. putt, sut, tinn, chidda, nid; Majhi puttar, sutar, trai, chidra, nlndar. (ix) Pronominal suffixes occasionally heard at Lahore, become more prominent as one goes towards Lahndi, but are altogether absent in Ludhiani. (x) Ludhiani is more regular in its formation of the past tense or past participles ;than Majhi is.. Newton's Panjabi Grammar p. 460 gives a list of some fity irregular forms, all. of which I have heard at Lahore, but only about a dozen at Ludhiana, many of which have the regular form also, chatta from channa ' to sift' heard at Lahore should be added to Newton's list. (xi) The Future III sing, is often karlga etc. in Majhi as against karu or karuga etc., in Ludhiani. (xii) -ga is often added to the substantive verb in the present anpy past tenses in Ludhiani but never in Majhi. (xiii) The verb substantive in the past tense is conjugated for person in Majhi but not in Ludhiani. (sctV) The word for ' house' guar is pronounced with a-short | close vowel at Ludhiana thus [kcAr], but with a longenand opener* vowel at Lahore. In Pothowari it is distinctly [a:] which I observed at Taxlla. The Lahore pronunciation is somewhere between the two. I have not, however, observed this difference of pronunciation in other words ending in-ay. (xv) The word for ' one's own' is apna in Ludhiani but apiia^j 9 in Majhi, and av da-in Malwai. (xvi) L.S.I. IX1 p. 616 says that the postposition of the agent case is nai or nai in-Panjabi. So far as I have heard, it is ne or n§ everywhere as in LudihianT. ,. In the DoabI of the Hoshiarpur-| district, however, nai is frequently heard. (xvii) The vocabulary is practically the same in both ther. dialects, but quite a large number of words " differs in form and enunciation; e.g. Ludh. tinn (3)', geari (11)'caubi(24) pacci 5) bun (to weave), bhanaja (sister's son), gal (abuse), mala (wreath ),:latta or litta (taken)i' but Majhi trai, yahrg, cahvf panjhi, un, bhaneS, gahl, mahla, Hta etc. §8., Definitions. For the definition of Primitive Indian (PI), Middle Indian (MI) and Modern Indian (Mod. I) see Turner $5. In the course of the present study it was- often necessary to distinguish between Eastern Panjabi (EP) and Western Panjabi (WP). By EP is meant the language spoken in the South-eastern districts of the Panjab, viz., I/idhiana, Malerkotla, part of Ferozepore, the Powadh area, Jalandhar and "part of Hoshiarpur. Powadhi when specially mentioned,' denotes the language spoken about the town of Patiala. WP denotes the language spoken in,the districts of Amritsar, Lahore, Gujranwala and G-ujrat. and parts of Sialkote and Ghirdaspur. : .<• ^ Phonology. T §9. The phonological changes undergone by PI in its develop ment into Panjabi may be divided into two classes—Quantitative and Qualitative. The former depend on what is commonly called stress-accent. They affect syllables as a whole but unless the syllable contains a long consonant or a consonant group, appear in vowels only. The other kind of changes depend on the position, the neighbour and the articulation of a sound, and generally affect consonants but very rarely vowels also. , Here it \ i will be more convenient to treat separately the changes undergone bv vowels and consonants. .' . . •• \ * Vowel-changes.- • *""x §10. Accent. As just mentioned, vowel-changes mainly depend on stress accent. Now the nature, history and even the very existence of this accent in PI or its- subsequent stages,are not known with any certainty. Although the; Sanskrit Grammarians make no mention of a non-musical accent, and although' it is *-> i highly improbable that it should have escaped the notice of the \ eminent Hindu phoneticians, if it had been at all prominent, yet f the fact that so many vowels were shortened or dropped in the course of their history compelled scholars to propose different theories for their explanation. Dr. Pischel ascribed to the [.musical accent of -PI, functions similar to those of stress-accent in explaining certain Pkt. forms1, while Sir George Grierson* and Prof. Jacobi8 assumed the existence of a stress-accent in Vedic and Sanskrit apart from the musical one. Originally perhaps the stress-accent fell on the same syllable as the musical accent and hence the grammarians' silence about it*. In course of time the musical accent ceased to ex;st, and then the stress-accent which then fell on the same syllable that had lost the pitch, readjusted itself till it was thrown on the first syllable, or on the syllable (except the final) containing a long vowel j and if there were more than one syllable containing long vowels, on the last | (not the final) from among those. $11. The different views regarding stress-accent in Sanskrit j and Prakrits held by Pischel, Jacobs Grierson and Bloch5have been discussed at length by Turner*. He shows that the examples which the German professors have explained in the light of stress- accent can be explained in a different way, and may not at all be due to stress. His enquiry has, however, brought to light another very interesting fact, namely that the IAVs can be classed into two groups of which one (consisting of H. G. Panj. and (1) Grammatik der Prakrit Sprachen ^§ 141-47. (2) Z.D.M.G. Vol. 49, p. 395; J. R. A. S. for Jany. 1895. (3) Z.D.M.G. Vol. 47 p., 576. (4)" Cf. Prof. D. Jones's remarks: " The subject of stress is very closely connected with that of intonation. It is certain that much of the effect commonly ascribed to stress is really aj matter of intonation." Pronunciation;of Russian 1923 § 763. For functions of musical and stress accent see Giles: Com parative Philology?: London 1901 $$ 88-94. (6) J.R,A»&, 1016, pp. 203, : * 9 possibly Beng. and Singh.) descends from a Pkt. or Pkts. in which a penultimate stress1 had developed, and the; other group repre sented by Marathi comes from a Pkt. in which the stress had appeared on the same syllable as the Vedic accent. §12. Without postulating' further on this point, it is certain that there was in Skt. and Pkts. something with functions similar to those of stress-accent, and that this had much to do with the phonology of the lAVs. We may call this something the syllabic prominence of a word which accord ing to phoneticians comprises three distinct forces—length, stress and pitch. In some languages one of these forces may be more conspicuous than the others, e.g. in English stress is more marked. In others length may be more conspicuous as in several Indian languages© S> . Dr. Bloch's remarks about Marathi that it is convenient to regard the regular vowel- changes jof quantity and even of quality in that language as depending on a purely quantitative rhythm, fit in quite well with the above notion of syllabic prominence. ft Vowel-changes. §13. Having thus shown the necessity for assuming a stress- accent in Skt. and Pkts. and the place it occupied in the word, it is reasonable that the changes of accented vowel's should be treated separately from those of the unaccented. Vowels in accented Syllables. §14. The vowel-changes are comparatively more modern than the consonant ones. 2As we proceed from PI to Ml we find that vowels have ed nd except in some cases. The regular changes are r > a, i, u, ri-; (1 > ili); ai > §; au >o, the] long vowels becoming short before consonant-groups except in the N. W. Prakrits.2 Even in Apabh- (1) To be modified according to the statement about the re adjustment of the stress-accent mentioned in the last paragraph. (2) T. Michelson; JAOS, Vol. 31 p. 232. / 10 ramSa the condition of vowels has remained practically the same as thafc in Pkts, except in the final position where they have been shortened. But the case is very different when we come to the modern vernaculars. In these the unaccented vowels have suffered terribly. 3?he only force to preserve syllables and consequently vowels was accent. It is, therefore, that vowels in accented syllables in whatever position they may jbe, have come down unchanged. Here it may be pointed out that an accented syllable is usually closed or intoned in Panjabi, the reason being that the PI intervocalic stops have disappeared or become h, and most of the Panj. intervocalic consonants are the result of PI consonant-groups. §15. Examples: ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ a > a : agg (agni-); at^h (ast&u); sapp (sarpa-); cand, WP cann (candra-); karna (karoti); gadha (gardabha) a > a : andia (anda-), adda (ardra ), kanna (kan (1) In Skt. closed syllables were of two kinds—closed by aJ single consonant and closed by one or more consonants of a group the rest of which formed part of the following syllable. Closed syllables of the first kind occurred in pausa only, and those of the second kind in the interior of a word or sentence. For closed syllables of Panjabi see Length in Phonetics. .; (2) This is perhaps a universal rule in languages where long consonants exist. For Russian see D^Jones: Pronunciation of Russian §§ 746-50. • I i2 §18. In the North-Western Prakrits the tendency for shortening long-vowels before consonant-groups does not seeml to have arisen. At least there is no documentary evidence to show that they ever shortened the long vowels in closed syllables to such an extent as to confuse them with the original short ones. ASoka's edicts at MansehraJ andl Shahabazgarhi do not help us in this matter as they are engraved in Kharosthi script which does not mark vowel-length. The Girnar recension, however, preserves long-vowels before! consonant-groups,1 although, in Gujarati ApabhramSa they appear as short, being again lengthened with compensatory! shortening of the following consonant. I I §19. The preservation of vowel-length before consonant- groups is a regular phenomenon in Panjabi, there being a few exceptions only. A final double consonant following a long! vowel is shortened. I I Examples:— % a : satt (sapta), hatth (h&sta-), kamm (karma) dand (danta-), sadd (Sabda) etc. 1 I a : kauna (kancja ), passa (par£v& ), kath (kastha-). I I i v sinjana (sincdti), citta (citri), mitt (mitri.) I i : llkh (liksa). u : sutta (supti-), putt (putra-), duddh (dugdha-). I u : sut (sutra ), cunna (curna-). I I e: netti (netri), jet^ha (jyestha), khet (ksetra-). 'I I o : kottha (kostha ), cokkha (coksa) I §20. PI ai au before consonant-groups are represented by i, VL (ore, o presumably short) in* Pkts., but in Panjabi they appear as long e, o, so in H. Guj.2 etc. after lengthening of the Pkt, short e, o. I I (1) Michelson: JAOS Vol. 31, pp. 231—34. I I (2) Turner: §37. I ai : ekka (aikya-), cet (caitra-) * •. *' au : potta (pautra-). §21. Exceptions are of two kinds, (i) those in which an originally long vowel is shortened and (ii) those in* which an originally short vowel is lengthened. The first kind seems to have been borrowed in the Pkt. stage, and the second kind in the modern stage from some neighbouring dialect having opposite tendencies, possibly Bagaru or vernacular Hindostani. (i) It is interesting to note that most of the exceptions of first kind have r as the first member of the consonant-group that comes after the long vowel. §22. a > a : alia (*ardla-), baddal (vardala-), mang«na (margati) but mag f. 'parting line of hair' if derived from marga must be a loan from H. cf. Panj. magar /after' (marga + ra-?), magghar (margaSira-), kattak WP katta, katt§ (karttika-) maihga (mahargha), baddhi 'bribe' is from *vardhika-, pattha 'muscle' if connected with a vyddhiform of prstyha; apna (atmanah) must be a loan from H. cf.-WP apna. Phaggan (from phalguna-, and not from phalgana-), amb (amra-, the form amra-, also, is found in the koSas). bajjana (vadyate) may have come from an analogical form * vadyate, cf. nadati.: nadyats, atta, Mul. atta, (Pkt. *atta-) may be a loan from -H.,if it is derived from a PI word beginning with short a followed by a group r + consonant, cf. Pers. ard. - §23. 1 > i : tikkha (tlksna-) is rather difficult to explain. No PI word containing I + r + consonant has been found to exist in Panjabl. The reason -is that most of such words were past passive participles and they were replaced by analogical formations. §24. u > u:unn (Grna), kuddana (kurdati), kucc s(kurca-) dubb (dilrva), mu §33. i > n : This again is due to umlaut, f. e:f the influence of an u in the following syllable, and is very rare. bund beside bind (bindu-), nuccarna beside WP niccarna (*niccurna, intransitive of nacorna < niScStati). sungh«na) (ginghati) comes perhaps from * Sffikhati cf. Wackern §146. §34. i > e: J)ue to a following h under certain conditions. See §76. < i > e: According to Pkt. grammarians, i, u often become e, o before consonant-groups (Pischel § 119). Such words are more properly to be derived from Vfddi-forms (Bloch §80). ksssu (kimSuka- : kaimSuka-), nembu (nimbuka-: naimbuka-), sem (Simba: Saftnbya-), seth * expressed sugarcane* (^i$ta-:[*^ai$ta-^ cfjH. slth, Mar. ^f|.JJ j' ||( | J g 18 .,* §35. J > £; The words in which this change has been noticed by Pkt. grammarians can be explained otherwise (Pisch. §§115,122), -In Panjabl two examples have survived which are, also, shared by-other IAVs. As to khelna, khetjna (krldati), it is probable that there were two separate roots Vkrfoji and Vkbel in PI which were confused with each other in Pkts. (cf. Pischel §122). baheya, (vibhftaka). Pischel §115 quotes bahetaka as found in Vaijayanti 59, and vahedaka in Bohtlingk. Evidently the form in which ;the word was borrowed by Vedic from the aboriginal speech seems to be different from the form .which gave rise to the modern words, AMg. vibhelae points,to vibhedakah (Pisch. § 121, Bloch § 80). * 1 §36. VL > a: Only one example has been found in which an accented u has changed to a, WP apparna beside upparna (ntpatati). In maulna 'to blossom, the change goes back to Pkt. (mnkula-> mafi!a*Pisch. §123) where it is regular, cf.-; Pkt. mail- < mrdn. §37. u > i: siuna, seona (svarna-: suvarna-:*sivarna-). §38. fii >.o: Like i > e, this change, too, noticed by Pkt. grammarians can be explained .by vrddhi forms (Pischel § 125, f • w / Bloch 80). ponna (pun preceding, vowel. Hundreds of such cases;can be quoted from AMg. and other Pkts, .•••«:.. : ' 1 §43. As we pass from Pkts. to Apabh. we find that'!the final [vowels have once more been* shortened. Here the words end in vowels only, usually short, pure or-nasal. *" --'." •'• " X '•> §44.. In most of the modern languages the final1 short vowel of the Apabh. stage after a consonant has also disappeared, thus Apabh- gharu, phalu etc., become Panj. H. ghar, phal, Guj»: Mar. ghar, phaj, etc. The final vowel after another vowel 2d coalesced with the latter to form a single long* vowel, thus Apabli. ghodau, maliii become Panj. H. g'bora, mail, Guj. Kaj. ghoro or ghodo, mall. > The languages which retain- the final short vowel after consonants are Sindhi and Bihari. Panjabi belongs to the other category although an extremely short vocalic element [apis frequently audible at the end of a word. On the whoJe,:'itsieffect is not so distinct as in'Sindhi. §45. The decay of the final syllable is a striking phenomenon of the languages of the Indo-Iranian branch. " Numerous examples of reduction and loss in the Middle and New3Indo-Iranian dialects of the final syllable existing in the Old\Endo-Iranian languages'nlay be gathered from'almost every page of tire book "—Louis * Gray's Indo-Iranian Phonology. (H961). > " ll 5 * ^46. A, potent factor in the decay of syllables as seen in the more recent stages of the Indo-Aryan vernaculars (esp. H. Panj. Guj.) has been the absence of stress-accent on those syllables. The final syllable has always remained unaccented, and hence the gradual decay in its transition from one generation to the other,,.. §47. For the greater weakness*and decay of the final sounds1 of a word than the initial ones, another reason may be given; viz., the economy of effort. Every speaker becomes more or less conscious of the beginning of separate words when using them with^ different suffixes and prefixes to express the allied meanings. '*; Now mutual intelligibility being the main object of language, the effort of the speaker to speak and. that of the hearer to hear the final sounds of a word are relaxed as soon as the intended meaning has been disclosed by the initial syllables. Consequently the final sounds lose their, importance and thereby become more liable to decay. ... §48, As^mentioned above, Pkt. words could end"in a 'vowel, short ok, long, or in anusvara preceded by a short vowel only. A ! _i— ]# Apabl . ^the lone: vowels were shortened and the anusvara was 21 changed into Ithe nasality of the preceding vowel. In l?anjabi they .all have disappeared after a* consonant, but have contracted after a vowel. §49 Examples of-the loss of final vowels. Skt. Pkt. Apabh. Panj. Pkt. -a kara kara kara kar panca pamca pamca panj sapta satta satta satt Pkt. -a murdha muddha muddha muddh (Bhavisatta. 167> 4) at ma appa [Panj-Pkt. ap appa] lajja la j j a lajja- lajj jangha j amgha jamgha ja^ngh (Bh. 77, Pkt. -i upari uvari cf. uppar AMg. uppini if Pkt. -I agnih aggi aggi kuksih cf. [kucchi kukkh • • kucchi] bli agin I bhaini vahini bhain (Bh, 309,4) Pkt. -u iksuh *ikkhu, ikkh cf. ucchu Pkt. -u vidyut vijju vrj;ju bijj 3vaSruh sassu sassu sass Pkt. -e krodS kode kol parSve passg passe* pas (Panj. Pkt *passe*) Pkt. -o putrah putto puttu putt balah balo balu bal Pkt. i-ara phalam phalani phalS. phal Pkt, 4m aksi [acchimd [acchi] (Bh,) akkh Pkt. -um a£ru amsum injli, WP. anjh. Ill I PI I If If] I I §50. From the pronouns of the first and second persons plural, asme, *tusni§, .we- should expect Panj* *as[s]y] *tus[s] through *asse, *tusse; but actually we get asl, tusi, or as§, tusa. The i in the fist pair seems to represent the instrumental case termination because after them the agent sign ne is not usedj The-S in asa, tusa seems to be the regular oblique plural termination, added- to as[s], . tus[s], on the analogy of nouns. These forms could not have come from asman, *tusman, for they,I too, should have given as[s], tus[s]- through * assa, *tussa. The conjecture that a in asa, tusa, is an oblique plural termination is strengthened by 'the fact that -the agent sign ne can be optionally used after them. Before other postpositions like na, da, t5 etc. asi, tusa1 (and | not asl, tusS) are used. When accented on the first syllable they are pronounced separately from the postpositions, thus &sa ne, dsi da, -tust nu. But when accented on the second syllable they are pronounced as oneword with the postpositions. In this! the nasalisation of -5 Is^taken away, the initial a- of asa omitted, and the '-&-. of tUsS changed into -h- which then is shifted to t. The postposition da becomes da: The change of s > h and the omission of a- are* optional injlajhi. Vowels in non-final (unaccented) syllables. I I §51. Preaccentual. " j . ; (a) IVhen the syllable was initial-and consisted of a vowel alone, it-was reduced, to a neutral vowel, -which in some cases regularly and in others optionally disappeared. But u in dialects other than Poadhi tends to maintain its U quality however short it may ^become. „»,, -: ... a: gUttha, (angustha-); nhera, WP hanera also ( * andha- kara-); rlftha WP harlttha (arista-) ;.khara, akhara (aksava-ta-)j bacc, WP vacp (apatya), the a- must have lost very early, bacca is frt>m,Pers. bacca as;shown by b- in WP.; dhaun (ardha-f-mana-); naj, anaj (annadya-)J; gaha, agahtl (dgra + ?); hunl(adhuna). 23 The dropping of a--in asa has already been spoken of..* maus amavasya) mayjbe a loan, or -m- has been preserved*! through*the loss of a- before the change -m->- (v). dhaunca (ardha-pancama-) is a loan because of-nc->nc. '* " §52. a: Harh -(Asadha-). The Dogri pronunciation of this word is peculier, something like ahar [?<.a:r].t WP akhan (akhyana-). More cases can be cited from Persian- loanwords, e.g., ram or aram (aram); baj, abaj (avaz);'- san, asan,* (asan) etc. •' • «7 . •::.• ( v -. - . - . :v §53. i: For i also one has to look to Persian loans, laj, alaj (*ilaj); nam, anam (in'am) §tc. """;• I:- aman, vul. man (Pers. Iman); asai, vul. sal (Pets, 'isa+i). §54. u: utahS or tahft (ut+?); utarna, Poadhl tarna, atarna (uttarayati); uthauna, Poa. thauna. athauua (ntthapayatiy. In batna, WP vatna (udvartana-) the loss of u must have: taken place before the shift of accent, cf. H. ubtan. Similar may; be the case with bakkhar (upaskara-), baihna* (upaviSati)- and barftha'(upavista-). ~ §55. g: e was first reduced to e or i, and then became neutral- vowel (or was lost) rind or arind (eranda-), gearS (ekadaia cf. H. igyarah, Guj. agyar), katti (ekatrimSat). Similarly the words for 41, 51, 61, 71, 81, 91,101 are pronounced without and sometimes with the neutral vowel. Other compounds of eka, also, lose the e-, e.g., kattha- (ekastha),.kalla (Pkt. ekkaWa-). •'" V §56. (b) When an unaccented vowel comes after a emu sonant, the same thing happens, viz , it is reduced to a* Neutral vowel which may disappear but still leaves the impression of a vowel owing to the explosion of the consonant. The vek mark about-u applies-here also. The-change u > a takes place^ if the next syllable contains o or u but not otherwise; Examples illustrating this rule will be found under u: §57. a;'takhan (taksana-), phalah (pala^a), '•*•••'". •'••••".•: • • • f ItHBH^ 24B 11H M111 III a: ijamal (j£matrka-) where -m- is of secondary origin; WP bhanea (bhagineya). In Pers. loanwords e.g. bajar (hazard. §58. i: WP and Poth. preserve the i unchanged. basa-h, WP visah (viSvasa-); naputta, WP niputta (nis- putra-); nasaftg, WP. nisafig (ni^anka-). Trnaroa (nlroga-), lalari (nfla+kara->, cf. Pers. nilkar; nflgar which gives Panj. lilgar. $59. u: purana or parana (purand), dukan, Poa. dakaivj (Pers. dukan). u: tulal (tula + ?) $60. (i) Unaccented i, i, g become e before [h]-a, [h]-o\/but a closer i before u. peara (priyakara-), seal (iitakala-), keara, (kedara-), beah vivaha-), dehara (divasa- cf. Mar. dis), tehaea (*trsayita-), but jiun (jivana-), ne§da but niuda. (nimantra-), gfteo WP ghiu (ghrta-), pgo WP. piu (pit&). $61. (ii) n» s followed by a syllable containing u, u or o become a. damuhl (Panj. do+mQh hi); dasutti (Panj. do+sut + i); kaputt (kuputra-), kasutta (*kusutra-y cakor (Paj. cu + kor standing perhaps for kon < kona-); cakhunja (Paj. cu + khunja) $ kabol (Paj. ku + bol). $62./ (iii) u, § followed by a syllable containing. a, I, g become U. kudhaba (Panj. ku + dhab +-a); dutahl (Paj. do + tain- +-T); dutara (Panj. do + tar + a); cuphgre (Paj. cu + phgr + g); kunlt (Panj. ku + nit); kurlt; (Paj. ku + rit); dusera (Paj* do + sgr + a); kunau (Panj. ku + na-u), nuklla (Pers. nskila), kuhara etc. $63. The above changes in an unaccented vowel before an accented syllable }are quite regular and frequent in nominal 1 2$ and verba? derivation when the shift of accent brings about this condition. ch6t$a v chu^al, nikka: WP nakera, pfla ' yellow': palattan ' yellowness' kaura: kurattan; bikkhar: bakhlr^ nigghar; nagMr, Jim: jamav sfm: sam3, biji baja* ;«t61::tuia, khfchl; khalha etc. §64. Post-accentual,—A short vowel, (a, i, u) after an accented syllable is (i) reduced to a neutral vowel, - (*ii) but is altogether omitted if the. accented syllable of the resulting word is closed by a short or single consonant. (i) kangan (kankana-),cannan (candana-),kajjal (kajjala-), kappara (karpata-), cibbhar- (cirbhata-), dakkhan (daksina-> satthal (sakthi>f manak (mamkya-), tittar (tittira-), ukkarna (utkirati), bairan (vairhtti), mallan (maMni), banaj (vaiujya-); WP pabbaiji (padmini), mirac, WP marac (marica-* maricya-> tiggarna (udgurati), kuram (kutumba-), ktikkar (kukkuta\ lakkar (lakuta- : *lakkuta-), surag (surunga), phaggan (phalguna-), guggal (gulgalk,) ungal (anguli-), kangani (kangunt), takkala (tarku-). - s §65. (ii) tfrcha (tiraSca-), putla (puttala-),khurpa (ksurapra-) dtfhta (dauhitra-), bahldi (haridra), dharti (dharitri)-; bijfi (vidyut), pasH but also passali (pargu-). §66. Of dissyllabic words whose scheme- is t * where th« first syllable is open and the second closed by a single con sonant, there is an alternative pronunciation $£. s$ i. e„:with the first syllable closed and the second open. This latter pro nunciation is more frequent in words where a non-stop separates the vowels thanvwhere a stop comes between them. banat or bant« ' structure,r camak or camk» • brilliance % dhar«t or dharta 'earths, bhal«k or bhalk* * to-morrow', mas«k or mask" ' water . skin \ taihal or $aiMa * service etc.; 'with stops : bhagat or bhagt* 'devotee,' nagad or nagda 'cash'. 26 §67. Long vowels as a rule do not come after accented syllables except in final position, e. g., kala, gadha carhai etc.—But if a long vowel is left unaccented after an accent ed syllable through a shift of accent, it is treated as above after being shortened; e. g., pariksa > parikkha > parakh ; niriksa > nirikkha > nirakh ; haritaki-> E. P. harar, WP harir. Effects of h on vowels. ; §68. It is a curious fact that the presence of an h in the immediate vicinity of a vowel brings about important changes in its pronunciation. These changes may be studied under two heads (i) changes in timbre and (ii) changes in pitch. The first kind of changes, spread over a wide area—Panjabi, Sindhi, Gujarati, Hindi, PaiSaca, and Persian, are accompanied in Panjabi simultaneously by tone-effects also, except in E P when h is intervocalic. §69. In Mod. Persian what is denoted by fath (i.e. a in the Native Script) is actually pronounced e before an A, thus- the word in native spelling mahr is pronounced mshr 'kindness'; ka|>], ke[ft] 'that'; ca[A], ce[7i] ' what ' etc. In these cases, however, the a i. e. the fath goes to Pehl. i.1 In Gujarati the whole group ah becomes e *. The changes [undergone by a vowel before h in Hindustani • have been described by Dr. Bailey.8 The Panjabi changes are very similar to those of Hindustani with a few differences. The h, if final or followed by a consonant, shades off into the high tone, while in an intervocalic position it may (in WP) or may not do so (in EP). For Sindhi see L. S. I. VIII1 p. 22. (1) Grundriss der Iranischen Philologie: I. pt. 2, p. 21, § 3,4. Cf. Sten Konow: J.R.A.S. 1911 p. 5. (2) Grierson: Phonology, Z.D.M.G. Vol. 49, p. 409. Turner: " The e and o vowels in Gujarati", §11 (vi) b.. . 'I (3) Bulletin of the School of Oriental Stucjies: II. p. 545. 2t §70. | (?) |An[ accented|a {followed by an h | which is jeithei* final or followed by a consonant is pronounced ai at a higher tone, the h itself becoming silent. In-the Gurmukhi script, an 4 is added to the h, \ I kaih, spelt in Gurmukhi kahi (kathaya, Pkt. kahghi), baih, „ „ bahi, (vaha, Pkt. vahahi ?) I kaihna „ „ kahina, (kathana-) I jaihmat „ „ jahimat (Pers. zahmat). I I §71. («') If the h is followed by a short a, the a before h changes to ai, but the tone-effect does not take place. kaihan, Gur. kahin (kathana-) but also kaihn [kAen], kaihar, Gur. kahir (Pers. qahr) also kaihr [kAer.] §72. (hi) An accented a may also be pronounced as aw before an h under the same conditions as in (t) and (it) above. In tlie Gurmukhi script, u is added to the h, pauh, Gur. script pahu, (prabha) also paih. I kauh, „ „ kahu, (kathaya, Pkt. kahasu, kahahuH also kaih. I rauh, „ „ rahu, (rasah, Pkt. rasO) beside raih. I nauh, „ „ nahii, (nakhah, Pkt. naho), beside nelh. I pauhar, „ „ pahur (prahara-) alsopaihar,paihr, pauhr I bauhat, „ „ bahut (bahutva-). I Note that in Persian loanwords a before h does not change into au, §73. )In the tadbhava words the changes a > ai and a > au Ibefore an h are probably due to epenthesis, for there was an i or u after h in almost all cases. Moreover these changes must have Waken place before the elision of the final i, u, and when the h [had turned jintoJaBtone, Jthe two vowels naturally J resulted (1) Beames J I j p. j|l31, | Grierson; JPhonology,|Z JXM.G Vol. 49fe. 402 m. * I I I* T II I I into a diphthong; thus, Pkt, kahehi > kaih [kXe]; 'Fki. raso > Apabh. rasu|> old Panj. #rahu > rauh [rAo]. $74. The two alternative pronunciations of one and the same word with ai and au are perhaps due to confusion of different forms, thus , * m + ^ + m % s * i ras5 > rauh, rasena or rasaih > raih ' nakhs > nauh, nakhena or nakhaih>naih. At first these pronunciations were used for different cases of the same word; later -one form was used for all the cases. This phenomenon may have been dialectal, i.e., one dialect chose ai for all cases}and the other au. Subsequently borrowing took place, ;and hence both the pronunciations are found in one and the same dialect. > / . ^ §75. (iv) An accented a before h which is followed by a or I is optionally pronounced as e or ai; thus:— saha, sella or saiha (saS&[ka]-) : pahav peha or paiha (patha-) V gaha, geha- or \gaiha (graha-) • "\~> kahl, kehl or kaihl cf. H. kasi, kassi nahi, neh! or :naihi cf. H. nahf, L . The ad pronunciation before lis peculiar to DoabJ of the Hoshiarpur district. •:)•.. , H r? _. |:;: ..This change, also, was perhaps originally due to the presence of an i in the next syllable, e g> in keha (kathita-), reha (rahita-); peha. (pathi-) ; and later was extended analogically* t |":: §70, . (v) Accented i, u jare pronounced e,-o before & as iju {e^ and -{£)• behfvisa-), WP bheh (bisa-), [K] >teli< (trsa), [K] kehij (kasya-cf. H. kis), similarly jsh-, eh. toh (tusa-), khoh (k§udha), 1)ho [h] (bus&-), mohrl (mukhara-),mohla (mtisala-)-. For similar phenomena in Persian, see Gruudriss" der Iranische& Philologie: LJpt 2, p.}25 § 5; p. 30 § 5. J l | |' ]* \ ' i Mil if in29 n in r i II §77. (vi) In a few cases accented a, i, u are lengthened before a final h. bah, WP. vah (vaSa), tlh (trsa), nuh (snus£). I §78. (vii) In some words accented e, 5 are pronounced I, u before/?, mth (megha-) Mi (lekha), plhg orpigh, (prenfcha) H. slrhl- (£re"4hi-) pajhna or puhjna (proiichati cf. Pkt. pumchai but H. po'chna); suh 'news' (*Sodhi-cf. bodhi) suhnl (SodhanI), suha (Sobha-), kuhnl or kshni (kaphoni-). The changes e" > l and B > u and inversely I > e and u > o are fairly common in DoabI of the Jalandhar and Hoshiarpur districts. §79. Tonic effects of Ji on vowels. The important changes which an h, whether standing alone or forming part of the voiced /and not of the voiceless) aspira tes, brings about in a neighbouring vowel had long been a puzzle to the istudents and speakers of Panjabi till Dr. Grahame Bailey discovered their true nature viz,, that they consisted in altering\the pitch of the vowel, technically called tones1. People, no doubt, had been conscious of the peculiar way in which the so-called voiced aspirates of the G-urmukhi script were pronounced by them. Tradition has it that Maharaja Ranjit Singh used this peculiar pronunciation as a test to detect the Hindostan (/.e. CJ. P./ people entering the Panjab without a permit. For foreigners, Indians of others, it is, very difficult to acquire this pronuncia-j tion. Hence the Pa njabis: often amuse themselves by challenging foreigners to imitate this pronunciation which the latter fail to ido even after many attempts. §80. The early European scholars couldmot discover where in the peculiarity of this-pronunciation lay. The Ludhiana Mis sionaries who 'brought out a grammar and a dictionary of Panjabi in 1850—54% speak of the Panjabi sounds represented by the (1) Panjabi manual: 1912 pp. xvi-xvii; Panjabi "Phonetic [Reader: 1914 p. xv; Linguistic Studies from the Himalayas: 1915 fipp. 1x-xii and passim. (2) Panjabi Grammar by J. Newton, Ludhiana 1851, two sub sequent editions. Panjabi Dictionaryjby Janvier, ]Ludhiana 1854. 30 Gurmukhi letters ^ 'gha,' ^ 'jha,' ^ ' dha ' etc. as merely aspirated forms of ^ ' ga ', ^ ' ja ', 3 ' da ', etc. In 1859 John Beames noticed that the Panjabi pronunciation] of WPR majh 'a-buffalo cow' did not exactly conform to its spelling1. He thought, "it might be represented by meyh, a very palatal f aspirated; perhaps in German by moch, or rather with a medial sound corresponding to the tenuis ch." As the observation Svas made at Gujrat and Jehlam where the tones exist in their usual varieties, the j was not aspirated but was preceded by the high tone. Later on Tisdall (1887) remarked "that h is very lightly sounded and is often entirely inaudible e.g. kiha, riha are pronounced kia ria). At other times it serves to lengthen the sound of the 'preceding vowel (e.g. bihla or wihla pronounced bela or vela)".2 Evidently it is a case of high tone which has baffled the author. Twenty years later. P. J. Fagan wrote, "But aspirate sonants are pronounced like surds, e.g., ghar 'house* sounds very like khar, Bhatti like PhattI, Dhariwal like Tharfwal'V If the remark applies to the language of Iiissar which is a tone language, the initial sound is an unaspirated sonant stop followed l)y a low tone. But if the remark applies to Panjabi which fact is not clear in the context, the pronunciation represented is an unaspirated voice less stop followed by a low tone. From among Indian writers, Bawa Budh Singh notes that the Nagari letters ** 'Mia', ^ 'dha' etc. were not suitable to represent the Panjabi sounds "produced in the throal a * • §81. Independently of the Kev. T. G. Bailey, I found in November 1912 that when Ludhiani was transcribed in Nagari [• (1) Comparative Grammar I p. 71. (2) Simplified Panjabi Grammar in Triibner's Collection of Simplified Grammars, 1889, p. 7. f (3) Gazetteer of the Hissar District. 1908 p. 68. (4) Hans Cog: (Gurmukhi) 1914 p. 13 "Panjabi sangh viccS j5 awaj nikkaldi hai, usnu dassan lal «r, *» ad di Sakal kafi nahi si." 31 or G-urmukhi scripts, each of the symbols called the voiced aspirated stops, represented three different sounds of the Ludhia.nl dialect as for instance in ghar, baghear and bagh which in Phonetic script represent kcAr, bageca:E" and bdlg respectively. Discussing them with Principal Woolner, I came to the conclusion that No. 2 was the sonant variety of No. 1. It was, also, noticed that if voiceless unaspirated stops were' pronounced at a very low tone as when making the lowest notes in alCLp (solfaing) the acoustic impression was somewhat similar to pronunciation No. 1, but beyond this I could not go. §82. The tones cover a much larger area than has been,mentioned by the Rev. T. G. Bailey. In fact they stretch right upto the Jamna. in the east, and occupy the districts of Ambala, parts of Karnal, Rohtak, Hissar and'Bikaner,"; the whole of Ferozepore, Shaikhu- pura, Lahore, Lyallpur, Gujranwala, Gujrat, Jehlam, Rawal pindi, and the Dogrl area, parts of Abbotabad, Hazara and Simla together with the whole of the intervening area.1 Dr. Bailey has noted the existence of tones in some of the Pahari dialects and in SlJtta (JRAS 1921, pp. 469-70) although Col. Lorimer donbts their existence in the latter (JRAS 1924 p. 206). §83. Dialects differ as regards the effects of an initial or intervocalic h on vowels, as regards the devoicing of the initialj stop left in place of a voiced aspirate after its h has been changed into a 4one, and also as regards thejkind of the tone produced by the h of a voiced aspirate. Examples of these various effects are fonnd in Dr. Bailey's Linguistic Studies from the Himalayas, 1915 pp. ix-xii and passim. Possibly there5? are minute differences in the total rise and fall of the pitch as well. 1 (1) This statement rests partly on the personal obs T mad dertaken on behalf of the Panjab University to collect material for a Pan jab i Dictionary, and partly on observation of the pronunciation of persons coming from these districts. J 32 I §84'; lln Ludhianijtheseleffects of /Jare aa follows| (1) Initial single h of whatever origin is unvoiced (i.e. is of the same quaMty as hin kh, eh etc), and, therefore, has no effect on its neighbouring vowel; thus hatth [hAt:ln], Wazirabadi [ReAt:h], (hasta-); hakk [hAk:] ^Wazir. [fi„Ak:] (Pers. haqq), haran [hara:n], Waz. [fic9ra:n] (Pers. hairan); hotal [ho^al] Waz. [fiotal] (Eng. hotel). §85. (2) Intervocalic single h of whatever origin is: partly voiced and partly unvoiced. It remains fcwhen followed by an accented syllable but may become a tone if -preceded by an accented syllable, luhar [luha:r], WP [luca:r] (lohakara); kahaal [kahani] W P [kcCini] (Pros, kahani); Ludhiana people pronounce the English word behind as [biha Bo!] while Wazira- bad people pronounce it as [bicain dhakana [tcekaiia, takcana, ortcakcdna], v bhukana [pcukana, pukcana or p (• §92. In verbs which have a high-tone vowel followed by a voiceless stop, the,high-tone becomes level in its transitive or causal form: pauhcna [pAoena]: pucana [pucana] baihkna [bAskna]: bakana [bakana]. §93. As to the origin of Panjabl tones, nothing more can be added to;what has/already: been written* by Dr. E. W, Thomas1 and Prof. Jules Bloch*. (1) Bulletinof the School of'Oriental Studies, II, *p. 829 (2) Melanges Vendryes: pp. 57-67. 34 Treatment pf p (j%). §94^ Tfie sxact pronunciation of r is not^known. At the present clay it is pronounced as ri by Norfn Indians and -as rn by Marathas and Southerners. The ancient Indian phoneticians des - eij^e it variously. Panini calls it murdhanyaf probably because he saw its cerebralising effects in the speech of his day,, 3?he Atharvaveda PratiSakhyaf(I« 20) regards it as jihvamullya which, according to Whitney, refers, perhaps, to the uvular articulation, just as there are two varieties of r- sound —alveolar and fwijjar. Possibly this difference of pronunciation is responsible for the different development,of the sound in th^ subsequent history of Jjido-Arv-an. §95. An examination of 4;he various treatments .oi* j* in ASokan inscriptions has led M. Bloch to the conclusion Ahat y>a was. the regular development in the <3outh-west; while j*>i in the North and East. j*>u is almost always due to the neigh bourhood of a labial sound.1 All these three treatments are found even in the RV. r>\ seems to b.e predDminent in Panjabi. §96. (1) r>a (for Vedic see Wackern. §9, for P&s. Pisch. §49). nacc°na H. nacna (nr'tyati) goes back to Pkt. naccai, perhaps a contamination of Pkt. *nicca*i and nadai. nac must be a loan from H. baddhi, WP vadcjhi 'bribe* (vjrddhi-) mayliave come from *vardhika. (jtaddha usually derived from drtfha should be connected with dardhya- cf. AMg. da |l)|La|langue|Marath^J§31f I 1 35 (f?$Zf, sing (Srnga-), diss«n2 (drSyate), khitfi fkr'ttifca)Jgheo, ghttr (ghrta^hla1 (hr'daya-), ghin (ghr^)» bfcchfi (vr'Scika-), sitfrta W.F. satrna, suH'na cf. Mar, Sl\ (sfSfa), ghisna* beside* g'-iasna cf. ghisar (ghrsyate), tla, tljja (trtfya-/ kflH#- (kj*ta) where the -tt- mast have been introduced on the anaiogy*of sutta, datta, tatta etc. pitta* 'back' to differentiate if from* thr regular puttlia 'inverted' (p|"$tha), miiua (m-rS^-); itfifiitlr* (mr'ttika) r>u is the expected change but has not been fourth in any language nor even in Pkt. cf. H.-maW, Mar. matt. Panj. ma^ti 'big earthen-vessel*. §98. (3) |»>u (for Ve<*ic see Wackern.. §19, for Pkts. Pisch §51); for' a correspondence of Indo-Iranian1 f to* Maid, or New Persian Ti after labials see Grundriss der* B-anische Phflologiey I. pt. 2 p. 30. §6,6). pucch«na (prcchati), bhujfna (bhrjjyat§)^puttha (p*Stha'-); butfidha (br in; consequence of the loss of intervocalic consonants. These .1 groups are usually treated in one.;of the twj ways, i.e. they either v become diphthongs or contract into a simple long vowel. ^ \ {,§101 Vowel-groups appearing as diphthongs in Panjabl. -a a->ea : camear (carmakara ), kamhear, kumhear (kumbha-? kara-) bhatfear (bhandagara), sunear (suvarnakara), naroea (nlrSgaka-), k§4earl (kantakara-), cheali (Pkt. chayalisa-) cheasl (Pkt. chayasi) For-a a> or more properly -aya- see contraction of vowehgroups. I ./• Pkt. or Apabh.-ai-> ai : bhain (bhagini), khair (khadira-), '\ pair (*padir&) cf. badhira-,]rudhira etc.JMacdonell Ved. Gram. § 171.). thera (sthavira-), is anfexception going to Pkt.Jthera-. • -^ Pkt. or Apa. -ai-> EP ai, WP ai: (Jain, WP _ Pkt. -ga-> ai: kaira (kekara-), chainl (chedana-)scf also ea-> § below. , Pkt. ' na- > BP ma but . WP ua : kamara, WP kuara (kumara-) jamar WP juar (yav&kara-) Pkt. 5&-> ua : gualla (g5pal&-) §102. The apparent insertion of h in juharia (dyutakara ) and the agent nouns karanhar Guj. karnar (karana + kara-) can be explained by treating these words as compounds with dhara- instead of kara- cf. Hoernle :, Cr Apabh.-lu >-l finally: fbl (blja-)» ji (jiva), nai (napita-), gerf ^gairika-), malli (malika ). Apabh. -iu o* the origin of which is obscure cf. Kalu mas. Kalo fem„ TarCi m. Taro f. etc. Medially: §104. Indo-Iraniau had four diphthongs—ai, au, ai, au.: By theitimetthe Pratigakhyas were composed, af, au had become simple long .vowels 8, 52. The tendency seems to have been to open the second elements so that ai, au; became ae, ao. This was>actual}y the case jn Avesta where daeva and karanaoti [correspond toi Indian deva and kynoti respectively. Later the firsj element a became fainter and fainter till simple e", o was the result. Along with this the qualitative change, aUo, may nave fregun simultaneously i.e. the a tended-,towards e, o and finaUy combined with the second elements e, o. The s ame processes I (1) EP matea, WP matrea go back to *matreya-, cf. W'P UhaseG < bhagin§ya-. • j 1 12)' Macdonell: Vedic Grammar §§ 15—16, .1 40 1 ' must have begun to operate on ai, au, but their elements being longer, required a longer time for simplification. Why the first elements of the diphthongs decayed and not the second • was due to the fact that "the relation of their elements is defined as equal, or the a is made of less quantity than i and u". * When ai, au had become simple vowels e, 5; ai, au were still passing through the middl nded diphthongs to the phoneticians, but a little later in Pali and ASokan, they, too, be came simple e, o. The Panj. diphthongs in inherited words, there- fore, do not representee PI diphthongs. $105. The loss of intervocalic stops in PEts. left many vowel's in hiatus. The modern diphthongs are always the result of these vowel-groups, several! of which have again dialectically developed into simple long vowels much in the same "way as the PI diphthongs did. (Grierson': Phonology §27,30). Thus karati>ApaW, karai fiFlg*? ^ZffigSL M(Braj. ghoyau —diphthong ghotakah > Apabh. ghodaiHGuj. Rajas, ghsyo — simple vowel H. Panj. gh » Some dialects have developed" [se]' and [o] sounds from Pkt. vowel-groups, perhaps through a stage of diphthongs; thus rava-> Apabh. *raula > Lah. rdla [ro:la] L. S. I. VIII1 p. 27. Similarly Lah. cara [coifa] but Panj. cauya; Lah. tra [tr»] but WP. trai.2 The tendency of RajasthanI to simplify the diphthongs ai au has been noted by sir George Grierson, L. S. I. IX2 pp. 20, 54. PowadhI has a great tendency for simplification of the final diphthongs : thus, gae I ge 'they went', gal I gi 'she went*, lau I lu 'he will take etc. I have heard., several (1) "Whitney : Sanskrit Grammar §286 on the authority of PratiSakby \i (2) For Gujarat! see Turner : "The E & 0 vowels at »Guj* aratl" published in Sir Ashutosh Mukherjee Jubilee Volumes (Orientalia) pp. 337-47, 41 mere examples from people of Powadh. Compare also Ambala, Rajas, skara as «agaiffist >Panj. karea; dhara against dharea, ef<% Maya Singh's Dictionary gives several doublets ; e±g. cpakaupa; pakoya, paunfla : pond a, paukkha : pokkha eta "; • ^106. Another point worth mentioning about the diphthong- Hi. au resulting from Ykt. vowel-groups with a as ^their' first member is that they are rising diphthongs in1 EP and -falling in WP. At least they are so transcribed in dictionaries:. T£ damanl EP. 4aun WP. daun ,. Hi dakini EP. 4ain WP. darjtt ghatffla EP. ghail • WP. ghail nSma EP. nau WP. nSu Bapita-+-4nf EP, nain WP. nain Similarly, EP. jayau : WP. jara; EP. ralau : WP rate eta From the ilastftwo paragraphs we see that it is the glide element of a diphthong that disappears in its development r into a,simple long vowel. Vowel-gradation*1 . >. ?...» §107. The vowel-gradation so prominent in IE has bee«i on the decline in Aryan even though it had. also gained a certain analogical "extension, The first step to this decline was^the confusion of HE I, 6 with % in Aryan. Later thecieve- lopment of f-> a, i, n and that of ai,*au >*$ 6 in Pkts. ¥urtheT limited its scope. In'Mod. Indian, however,' it is confined chie'fiy to express the relation between simple *and causative or rntnrasi- tive and transitive verbs.. In languages other^ than the j?N W group (Bin. Panj. Lah. etc.) it has suffered,especially the a^a series (1) loj lengthening of vowels consonant-groups and (2) ^by the extension of the -apaya- causative suffix. Panjabl • iflL) >For ia bwef history and its operation inKJujarati see [Turner § 14. Another $aper ,by the same, "The loss of; vowel* 'alternation in Indo-Aryan" published in the Proceedings of the Second Oriental Conference, Calcutta, 1922. (2) French Calcutta 1922. 42 has- however, been: safe to a great extent from, these; losses. Whereas we have in Guj. tapvfl^to be hot' (tapyati): itavvft to heat* (tapayati), phatvfi Ho be split' (sphatyate): pharjvfi'to split' (sphatayati), we find in Panjabi tapna r tauna, phatna: pharna. Whereas in. Hindi we have girna ' to fall': girana 'to fell', phirna Ho be turned', phirana Ho turn,' in Panjabi we find girna:, gerna, phirna: phema. - r • • §108. The series descended from-PI are a: a, i: §, n:6. a: a—marna: raarna, tarna: tarna, sarna: sarna etc. i:e-milna: melna, kirna: kerna, girna: gerna etc. a u: 5—^uW*na: torna, phut$ na: phorna, tulna: tolna. etc. $109. When the 'verbs are preceded by prepositions, the grades . still work orilthe "roots. Here however the root-vowels becoming-unaccented, i and u change to a which partly conceals the gradation. - - j ' a: a—uttarna (uttarati): utarna . (nttarayati). ussarna : usarna. nittarna : natarna, niggharna : nagharna, ubbharna : Ubharna, ullarna?: ularna. 4- • - ft i'e-bifckharna (*viskirati):bakherna (viskerayati),nkkarna: ukerna, nikkhafna. (cf. khitati): nakherna, ukkharna : ukherna, but r Guj. ,-H. ukhar : ukhar point to a verb.*khatati» nibbarna: naberna, cimbarna: camerna, WP. camorna, libbarna: labgrna. ghusarna: ghuserna, uddharna: udherna. « u •: o—nuccarna WP. niccarna: nacorna, biccharna. (vicchutati): bachorna, sangucc«na: sangocc^na, sungarna: sagorna. Many of the examples cited' above are late analogical 'formations. * y-7 ' •§110. Two more grades have>i developed in Panfebt but are of a very restricted application, viz. (i) short vowel followed by a single consonant: short vowel followed by a long or conjunct consonant, (2) short vowel: long vowel. ' 43 .-.v. (1) a+single consonant: a+long or ' V ^" B -'- gudna: gudoVna. 1 (2) Short vowel: Long vowel. ? : a': a—confused with a : a descended from P. I. i: i—micna: micna, bhirna: WP bhlrna, E.P. bherna, pisna: *pl8n>plhna» - V ' u:fl— phukna: phukna, sutna: sutna. / * / . Nasal vowels in Panjabl.1 - > §111. PI did not allow nasalisation of vowels except in a few,, cases at the end of a word or in pausa.*" Classical Sanskrit was still stricter in this respect. Only a non-Pragrhya a, i, n short or long could be optionally nasalised when occurring in a pause.* In Pali and ASokan it is not certain'how far vowels were nasalised, but in Prakrits there are numerous instances where a vowel; followed by an anusvdra* must be pronounced without the anusvdra and in consequence probably nasalised.5 This marks the beginning of a tendency which resulted in an abundance of nasal vowels in ApabhramSa and Mod. Indian. Nowwe know _^____^___ *| i —- . ..__ __ (1) For Marathi cf.^Bloch §§66-70, fo^Gujrati: Turner §16. Also see Grierson: " Spontaneous nasalisation in IA languages" JRAS1922, pp. 381-88. ' : r(2) Macdonell: Vedic Grammar §§66, i; 70, Ifc etc. ' * (3) Panini VIII, 4, 57. (4) Nothing definite is known as to what was the exact ['^pronunciation of the anusvdra in ancient times (Whitney: Skt. Gram. §71). At 'the present day it is pronounced finally and before non-stops, at least in Northern India as n(i;). Its con sonantal nature may be inferred from its making a heavy syllable with a short vowel before it. • ; r "> >T It ,<5) Pischel §§178-183., -.:. ... r 44 that the Pfet. anusvara was in most cases an optional substitute fori a PI nasal consonant. Thus it is dear that most of the modern nasal.vowels are due to the loss of a PI nasal consonant at some time or other. In this respect the history oC'the nasal vowels in Mod. Indian may be compared witfo that; of the> French. Panjabi is, however, comparatively freer from nasal vowels, than the other languages because it did not simplify nasal + consonant- groups after short vowels. §112. From the point of view of origin ^Panjabi nasal vowels may be treated under four heads:— 1. Those due to the disappearance of a PI nasal consonant.::— (a) An intervocalic -m- was split up into -v- > *v-„ and subsequently the -v- was, changed into u, thus we get nan (nama), than (sth£ma) etc. For the disappearance of u as in calla (*ealyami) etc., indhfiS (dhunnf } etc. See contraction of vowel- groups §103. For cases where -m- did not leave any trace of nasality see Denasalisation §§117-19. (&) Loss of intervocalic -n-, -JJ- in inflexional terminations^ thus, Gen. pi. -anam>Pkt. -anara, -ana, ana>-8 perhaps through* afi as in H. we have-0 possibly<-au, cf. Braj.-afi, Rajas.-u» For further cases see treatment of-n-^ -5- p. Also compare W.P. akkhI (1) This statement is based on my own observation of the pronunciation of persons from Ambala. The specimens given in the L. S.. IIX1 pp. 241—51 reveal the Hindi tendency for vowel- length e. g. the words ag, sas, sagh, mathe, mSje on p. 250, but we also find khillS (cf. H. khil) p. 249, cakki, hattha, picchs on p. 245andlagg|ontp. 250i • ! 46 nasal got into the words, at least into those ofAmbala, at a time when the latter had lost the tendency of voicing breathed^ stops, after nasal', and before Hindi had lengthened its short vowels in front of consonant-groups. -.The following are a few words out of a large number for comparison. PI. or .Skt. PanjabI Ambala. Hindi. " aksi akkh ankh akh ucca^ WP. ucca tinea Qca | (EP. unca) ifit'a (istaka) it* int It kaca- WP. kacc kanc k8c > EP. (kanc) i Saty a- sacc " saner sfic | ' sarpa- sapp samp sSp i\ > chift (stain) : chint (stain) 'M% hakk 'drive' hank hSk etc. etc. . §114. There are a few words in Panj. showing this kind of nasal which under conditions I (c) lost itself in nasalising the previous vowel. The nasal «in these words' is very early as it is found in other languages also except Marathi. But more probably they are loans from Hindi in , the face.of the above examples and on account of lengthening short vowels before cousonant-groups as in mingl, nid, mudga->Panj. mfingl, H. mag, M. mug : Panj. mugia "of colour of mungl, paks&-> Pkt. pakkha- > Panj. phangh (megha-). In maih it may b to an insertion^ of cf H. bhais, W P majjh, manjh msa Pali mahimsa This kind 7 is often omitted in spelling, e.g. pani [pronounced p8nl] jana [jinS], pina [pinS] §116 (4) Spontaneous nasal vowels for which -causes men- 3 cannot be assigned; e.g., guh (gutha-), jau (ya ju (yuka>,sauli (^apatha-) etc. dahl possibly derived from pi. dadhini. In the numerals 11.-18 gears, barS, etc., the -S is added per- the analogy of the oblique plural fo s ghara, batti etc., the ancient numerals having given simply gear, bar~etc, ^as in Gujarat!. Or it is the lengthening of the final -ah cf. «H. gyarah barah etc. and then nasalising it... X: , .. The termination of ;the Pres. Indie, II sing/ and pi. gets Pkt. karasi > Pani. kare\ Pkt, karaha > Pani. kar&\ De nasalisation. 117 It ofte msal vowel arising from the f nasality altogether when com* ing I accented Tl is is very conspicuous in Pre- karamt > Pani. Pkt. *kar&mda > old karada > k&rda. Poth. karna through karaipda- > karanna Lah karenda karenna come from karenita shift of Wl of accent, the nasal consonant h remained as in *yant Pkt. janida->janda. Similarly ) khadant->Pauj.|Pkt^^^ . khayanida >khanda, *svapant->Panj, Pkt. J *savanida-> saunda] etc. Tn « few cases where the vowel gets a special tone, the nasal consonant appears as the nasality of the previous vowel e.g., bhauda (*bhramant kaib d # kathayant-) but in WP they are bhaunda, kaihnda etc. The central languages, however, have dena salised it; e H. kh This points to a condition that the shift of ssyllabic with a consonant y #~5? v between, thu # khayaiiita or *khavaijit vamta (from • sv&pati, which developed into khavata>fehav^a>khavta>kbata etc. This v is also found in B.H, khavat, sovat. In Panj. also a few traces of this y or v are left as hi W.P, kbauna, but in Panj. participles'it must have become a^vowel glide at an early stage so that the whole developed into a diphthong which being a single ' sylOable preserved the accent and nasality, thus #khadant->Panj. Pkt. *khayamda->*lchaainda>-khanda. I In H. javna: jana; javta, EH. javat: jata, the insertion! of-v- must be analogical, cf. Nep. JSdo: audo. -,' For the loss of a preaccentual nasal cf. pacba-nja, H. pacpan (paiicapancasat), pacassi (pancaSiti-), pacanm§ (pancanavati); p&ccias from H. pacts, cf. W.P. p&njhi (25) Panj. paj&h but H. pacas (50). jabhara (jambha) : §118. The above consideration supports the theory of the Panj»rGenitrve postposition da,tPsth.>na derived from *sant-«as,sug gested by Beames; (Oram. II p. 291) against Grierson's view K.Z.1 XXXVIII p. 488. *sant-> sanda, handa, found in Ki. and SindhI (Beames 11290). «sanda:must have come to be regarded as part of the preceding word, and »s->h- which in course of time dis appeared. > Later it resulted into-JLda>Panjj. da or auda>anna>^ Polb. na according as ii lost the accent or not, §119. Another case where nasality frequently disappears is the development of intervocalicv-m->-u,->u,-a-. Nasality remains on a finalrsyl'lable but disappears from non-final syllables. I ; (1) iNasahty remains— * * •Ji- nau(nama), pau (panrS), thau (stigma), bhu. fbliumi) si (sima), ru (r6ma). lu (loma),l?ara (karami, callst (*calyami) etc. (2) Nasality disappears— T % aula (amala), kaul, (kamala-). caur (camara-), bliaur (bhramara-.), dauru (damaru);. W.P. juai, kuara. In neoxla, nluda (nimantra-), dhaun, (dhamaui), daun (daman!), baiinai (vamana?) the nasality is-due to the influence *ofii. r 49 Consonants. §120. The general development of P I consonants has been dealt with by Dr. Bloch §§ 14 ff. The same has been sum marised by Prof. Turner with special reference to Gujarat! {%% 34- 38). On the whole Ludhianihas undergone the changes assigned by the latter to N., W., or INI W (not SW) groups of languages but with the following additional remarks:— (1) Ludhianl has assimilated all the consonant-groups. Unlike Sindhi, LahndT, WP. it has treated the groups stop + r also in the same way. (2) The initial voiced aspirated stops of the PI or MI stage have been disaspirated and devoiced with lowering of the pitch of the following vowel. (3) An initial nasal+ h of the M I stage arising from P I sibilant + nasal has been disaspirated and the pitch of the fol lowing vowel lowered. (4) MI voiced aspirates or nasal + h groups in the in terior of a word lose their h and raise or lower the pitch of the adjacent accented vowel according as it occurs in the pre ceding or following syllable. (5) voiced stops after the nasal's n, n, m are assimilated to the latter. (6) v-, -w- become b, bb as in the east. (7) There is no distinction between dental and^ cerebral a and 1. O (8) Intervocalic -&- -s- -s- have become h and have consequent ly^ fallen together with the PI -h- and the MI -h- arising from PI aspirated stops. This h has again dwindled into a tone just as the aspiration of the MI intervocalic voiced aspirates described in (4) above. (9) The PI initial h has become unvoiced unlike WP and Lahndi. ;/ The development of a consonant largely depends on its place*) and neighbour in the word. Initial single consonants behave 50 exactly like intervocalic double ones (of PI or MI stage) with this difference only that: an initial voiced aspirate stop loses beside the h its voice also, while an initial vocalic double voiced aspirate stop does not lose the voice. (See 2-4) above. §121. As a rule MI double consonants appear as double in Panjabi but with the following exceptions: - (1) A MI double consonant when falling in an unaccented syllable is shortened, e. g. Pkt. cammaro > earner, manikkaip p>[ manak, passijjai > pasijje. (2) When it is final after a long vowel; eg, Pkt., katthani, Panj. Pkt. *kattham > kath; Panj.;Pkt *llkkha > likh. (3) A group nasal *i-' consonant under these conditions loses its nasal throwing the nasality on the preceding vowel; eg. Pkt. *paincasaiii I pannasam > pajSh; pallamko > paklag; pemkha. > pfgh. (4) In a number of words, a double consonant is shortened after an accented short vowel e.g. bil (bilva-), pacna (pacyate-), kasna (karsati) etc. (5) It is sometimes shortened in the interior of a word, e.g. foijlt (vidyut), putla (puttala-), cibhji (cirbhata-) (6) In rapid speech a good many double consonants are shortened. The cases mentioned in (4). and (5) may have been 3ue to this cause, or to an influence of Hindi, In slow speech In rapid speech^ kallh dl kalh dl (of yesterday) dass«da dasda (telling) peo putt dl peo put dl (of father and son) ajj ki din ail$ aj ki din ai? (what is the day to-day). I II I I Ifa I I I I I §122. Initial single consonants followed 'Iby a vowel have come dawn unchanged with' a few exceptions. They are far better preserved|than {the interior Jones.' The reasonlforlthis difference lis [ partij is of the beginning of a word and thelc they are {pronoun ced, and:partly theirlfreedomjfrom the influenceiof the lofr^glide of the preceding sound. • Aspiration. §125. There is a number of words which show aspiration in Panjabi, while in PI and often in cognate languages there is no sign of it. These may be considered under two heads—simple aspiration and aspiration now appearing as tones.; (For Mara^hi see Bloch §§"83-86 and for Gujarat! Turner § 40). §124 (1) Under the first head comes the aspiration of the initial k- and p-. This seems in some cases to go back to IE forms with a prcthetic s as is attested by similar cases in other IE languages. Some of these examples are shared by the cognate languages also e.g. khappar (karpara-) cf. Guj. khapriyfi 'crust of mucus in tlWmose,' Mar. khapar. khitti (kr'ttika), phaha (paSa- cf. Vspa§ 'to bind') Gnj. phiso. phind 'bah^ beside pinn (pi^uja-)'.; pharha (£ara$u-) Guj. pharSf. Khuh[a] ktipa-), for insertion-the4 second h cf. juharia (dyfitakara-). Khuddo, WP. khena (kanduka- cf. Vskand, Vskund'to jump'J khuno!hi (kuntha-) cf. Sindhi kuntfhti. kti (1) T Michelson thought it to be an eastern tendency (J A 0. S. Vol. 30 p. 39) and held "Shahab. and mans, hida to be a Magadhism. Similarly Mans. Lhidam if not a pure blunder ib. p. 92 n. 55 (a) Gen. Sing. Pkt. gho4a#assa> Apabh. ghsdat^] ahu (Pis- chel §366)>*ghDdehu > ghQre* the modern oblique singulardn H. Panj. The final e" is due to -aya-. In languages which reduce *aya- > a, we have the oblique form ghora as in Guj. Rajas etc., Sir George Grierson assumes Apabh. gh64aassa>ghodaahi> gh6 ft . 58 found in works of 5th or 6th centuries A.D. and upwards. The older ones are Vtank (from tanka- 'seal') 'to shut'. Katy. &r. IV, X. tankanaksara-'borax' Katy. gr. TIF paddh., tittibha- name of a demon Mn., yiijnam, Vtval = V tal Dhp. XX 5; dakim Pari IV, 2, 5t; V'cll Tan VIF, 2. 10; vdhauk Pa?. VII 4, 59. t: tang, taka (tanga-, tanka-), talna (tvalati), tatlhra (tttibha-)- th : Thaukar, Thakar cf. H. thakur (thakkura-). d-: dauru (damaru ), dain (dakiDi). dh-: dh5na (dhaukate). t-: tand (tantn-), tatta (taptd-), takkana (tarkayati), tau (tapa-), til (tila-), turna (turati), tin (tj-'na-). th-: No sure example is found except thukk which may be connected with Skt thutkara if that is not purely onomatopoeic. Skt. dictionaries give about a dozen words beginning with tfy | most of them being proper names or imitative sounds. d-: d&nd (danta-), dassana (dars*ayati), din (dina-), duddh (dugdha), dur (dura), diss«na (drSyate), dohta (dauhitfa-). dh-: dharna (dharati), dhar (dh£ra), dhoS (dhuma-). p-: panj (paiica), pair! (panlya-), pinn (pin^a-),]?!? (pltfa), putt (putra-), pucchana (prcch&ti), psh (pausa-). ph-: phal (phala-), phan (phana-), phala (phala-), phull (phulla-),pbaggan (phalguna-). b-: bakkara (barkara-), bannh«na (*bandhati), bSh (bahti-)» D* (bija)-, bujjh«na (budhyate). bh-: bhatta (bhakta-), bharna (brarati), bhau (bhaga-) bhft (bhtimi-),bhujj7na (bhl-jjati). §138. Intervocalic stops. Among these -k-, -g-, -c-, -j-, -t-, and -d- were lost altogether leaving a slight -f- glide in their place the effect of which is seen in the subsequent change a#a->e". -t, -4- became -r-. -p- became -v- in MI which later was lost, or changed to u and together with the preceding vowel resulted in a diphthong or a simple long vowel.-b-. is rare like the initial • 59 b-, and shared; the fate of -p-. The aspirates -kh-, gh-, -th-, -dh-, -ph-, -bh- were reduced to h in MI which subsequently 'lost itself affecting the^tone of the neighbouring.vowel. ~%h- 1 II TBI WI III I 1F°I1I II ff I I Ml U -d-: keara (kedara-), nal (nadf), sava (sapada-), je (yadi}> paun (padona-). - • --•- - - • -dh- hun (adhuna), -khoh (ksudha), dahl (dadhi-),- bsh (yedhar), beh in behmata. 'Fate' (vidtii). * •• • p : aut (aptitra-), nal (nfipita), bacc (apatya-> Pkt. avacca- the a must have disappeared at an early date), kalava (kalapa-),sava (sapada-), \VT ay all (ajapala). : -ph-~: kuhnl, k5hnl (kaphOni-), kahla (kaphala-l). ••,,..-% i"*" -b- : pie ' lie may drink ' (pibati). - W — - -bh-:laha (labha-), bhukkh (bubhuksa), gadha (gardabhd) for'subsequent appearance of bh-and do.-from b+h, drfh see il27), paih (prabha), sohna (Sobhate), W l\ karha (karabha-).- _ §139. .Initial nasals. .Only n-, m- are found initially in P I. In Ludhiani initial n- is invariab'y alveolar. So it (is in many IAVs.* In native scripts an initial n- i§ Written with the dental symbol while in other positions -with 'the dental-.or cerebral. Be- fore a dental stop it is dental and is denoted by^the dental sym bol. The "initial and. intervocalic n seems rto have become al- veolar at a very early date though its accoustic'effect was dental to some ears and cerebral to others. This is perhaps the reason r why" we find Vararuci enjoining :cerebraiisatidn of every n while in Jaina Pkts. the initial n appears as, dental. To say that the PI initial n remains unchanged in Mod. lis wrong So for as the actual pronunciation goes. Initial m- has remained un- changed everywhere. n-: nan (nava, ntoa), natthana (nasid-), nimm (nimba-) naroa (niroga-). m ; , ' ;' '? (1)- "1, n, though more usually alveolar, are sometimes made den tally."? Panjabi Phonetic Reader p XIII. 1 "n. Ordinarily it is an alveolar sound; before t, d, it is some what forward, before t, • - m-rmaoja (mancaka-)," missa (mh§r&-), mfih fmukha-Ji, mut {mutra-,) mutth (musti-), mittl (mr'ttika) fc# §140. Intervocalic Nasals. The difference between the treat ment of -n- and -n- according as. they occurred in the body of the word or in the Inflexional suffixes is found in. Panjabi also as in Grujrati \ In the latter position they disappear after ** *- giving>their .nasality to the previous vowel, but in the former position they become.alveolar n although in Gurmukh! script are often represented bycerebral n which is the', proper .treatment in malwai andmajhi dialects, -in-Was always split.up into .-f*.which f on became -u- Or'-tu and together "witTf'the'previous vowel ["resulted hilar diphthong or sometimes;in a simple'long vowel. - - ~K**~ • - * The"diphthong or simple vowel thus produced lost its nasality in tthe interior oC a word but kept"it when final/- The CaseS'where -m- appears in place of P I -m- are due to a secondary^ change of -v- -u- or even of -u- into -Tfl-"Which as far as can be seen took fplace before a long vowel (a, e). - - -; The only exceptions are maus (amavasya) and ami used as name (amr'ta), In the first'word -m may have Jseen preserved througl hd the second word may be a loan from MI (1) -nO preserved when occurring|in|theJbody of }a word -n- Jlalthough become alveolar: ^^^^^^^ -n : phan (pliant), surma (&raoti);ginaa (ga nayati: cf. griiSti Ho announce'), manak (manikya-),ban°j (vaijijya-). -n : una (una-)> Imn (adhung,), phaggau (phdlguna-),.panl 0 (panlya-), tauana (tanayati)/ "*-" 2) In inflexional suffixes, -11-, -n- were lost, giving nasality to thejpreceding vowel: ^^ ^^^^^ -akanam >-ea\ Now used asfOblique Gen. pi :- anam|>Ja^-ikanam >-ij*>) plural] -ukanam >-u& •rr (1) Turner: §66. 68 Km pi. nent^ani-> ff^fj; > j*} -% "sed.a.s » * Uukani > uaJ in the feminine £ de No Used in WP for Direct DJ. in the fern In EP. dahi Nom. Ace.pi. perhaps represents this change. -m-:'kaul (k&mala-), aula (ainala-), caur (camara-); bhaur (bhramara-), dauru (damaru-), nau (n&ma), pan (pama), thau (sthama), Id (loraa), dhQS (dhuma-)> calla (*calyami), karaj (karami) and all other Present Ind. 1 Sing, forms. t Alter the secondary change of u, -m- appears for PI -m in jamai WP jual (j£matr-),kamara WP. kuara (kumara-), kim§, WP. kiv§ cf. Guj. kern, (Pkt. *kimena? cf. imena), jim§ WP. jive (Pkt. *jime.ua) cf. Guj. jem, im. In the ordinal numerals as panjmi "VVP, panjva; (pancamd-) etc. Before the close vowel I however, the secondary change does not take place, e.g* sal (svami-),rQi (r6ma-), bhof (bhtimi-). By spontaneous nasalisation, or through the influence of another .nasal this change has extended to cases where there was no m- origmaliy. e.g., pamS WP. pava (pada-> pau + -a), jomar, WP. juar (*yavakara-), daman WP. duan (Pers. dlwan). §141. .Initial y-, v- become j-,b- respectively. In W.P, how ever, v-'remains v and 4n some words y- also appears as y-. iy-: jau (y£va-)> jot (ydktra-), je (yidi), jana (y£ti), Relative pronoun jo, j^hfa, jih- (ya-); jaihna but WP;yaihna also (yajmati), the derivatives from this root also appear with y- in WP. In ?EI-y-is retained perhaps in the educated speech only in words] with y-borrowed from Persian e.g. yar, jar (Pers. ya,r-), ya. ji (Pers. ya). v-: bakkh WP. vakkh (vak$a-), bijj (vidyut), binga (vakr&-) batj(vartta). §142. Intervocalic -y-,-v-. Excepting MI. -aya->e; toe y- between any other vowels disappeared. But when preceded by a close vowel I, e, u, a strongly fricative glide y developed before 6$ the original y and both became -yy- The whole group appears- as -iyy-, -eyy-, uyy--in pali which later on became -ijj-, -ejj-, ujfin Man. & AlVIg. and are found at present in S and M. Where, how ever, the* y glide did not develop, the -y- disappeared as in SaurasSnl and Mg. and"found so at present in Hindi. EP. belongs to the latter group, but there are in it a few words showing jj- which are perhaps loans from a dialect of the other group (cf. Bloch §105.) -v- also has two developments. It disappears before vdwels other than a, but otherwise becomes u and with the previous vowel forms a diphthong. -y-: (i) for-aya-> e see1 §103. (ii) pear (priyakara-), gana or gauna (gayati), karlda 'be- ing done* (Pkt. *karlaip.ia from kariadi on the analogy of dlaiji- ta-: dladi, piaijita : piadi etc ). (Hi) dujja beside dua (dvitiya-,;Pkt. duiya *duijj, cf. AMg. addhaijja-< ardha trtfya-), tijja beside tia (tftfy'a-, AMg. tieya taiya-), bhan«ja, WP. bhaneS (bhagineya-). daj (daya-) or perhaps from Pers. dad ' a gift.^ -v-:(i) chail (chavi4-*illa-, jl (jiva~) Pkt. jiv5), del (devf), beat (vivahd-), WP parihna (parivesayati) EP. parosna is a loati from H. (ii) Saun (Havana-), deor (devara-), jifin (jivana-), dhaula (Pkt. dhavala-), jhiur (dhivara ). (mJ nun, WP lu? (lavana-), saluna (salavana-) go back to Pkt. lona with a subsequent closing of the o vowel. §143. r, 1. For the separation of two dialect-groups in which the IE *r, *1 both appear either as r only or as 1 only, see Bloch § 139. They were confused into r in the West including Iranian, and into lin the East (Mg). The tendency to borrow (1) y1 appearing in Native spelling of the EP words or Of Hindi words is a glide introduced to avoid hiatus*. 64 words from one into the other is very .prevalent and is found even in the Vedic Texts. This borrowing became so extensive in course of time that in Sanskrit we often find 1 where Vedic had r, and sometimes r where Vedic had 1. fn several cases, doublets appear with r and 1 with or without difference in mean ing. PanjabI on the whole agrees with Sanskrit as most other IAV's do with a few exceptions. Intervocab'c -1- becomes -}- m WP. * * ' ; (?) ir, 1 agree with .Skt:— r: rat (ra'tri-), rann (ran f - F (m)„In a few words -ry- after short a became-11-in Pkt. It is found so in -Panj. and other IA Vs (Bloch §140—141). pal^na (paryasta-: Pkt. pallattav), palthi (paryasta-), pahl&g (paryanka),palan (paryana-). \>v) Skt.'-dr- > >anj.*-ll- as found in Pkt. alia (ardrd,-: Pkt. alia,), bhala (bhadri,-), khulla (ksudrd- AMg. chulla-, culla-, cf. Mar. culta). (v) Skt. 1 > Panj.r : after, saber (avela. savela) cf. Panj. bella (vela). ... .1 . (vi) In:aneortwo words fekt. 1 appears as n in Panj. e.g. nun VVP Jun (lavani-), nanghana beside langhana (langhate but.cft nankhati 'to .move'). The confusion between 1 and n is much more frequent in foreign words used in Panj., but with spread of education it'is dying out. ; T 65 §144. Initial &-, s-, s- all become s-. l-:sang (Sank£), sau (gata-), sauh (Sapatha-) etc/ $-: soli (s6 h.\ hatth, WP [ficAt;h] (hasta-), hfg (hydaya-), hal (hala-), harar (harltaki). .66 §147. Intervocalic -h- remains partly voiced but is often under conditions at present unascertained, reduced to' tone and in "WP almost always, f : V ' ?• . v r -h-:loha (l9hi-)» laha (labha-),Mh (bahu-), geha (gr&ha-), saihna (sahate). * f;> ' ••; ?. J f r*- « '» Consonants in contact. §148. Two or'ihore consonants coming together without the intervention- of a vowel were assimilated.2 The process of assimilation had been completed by the time of ASoka except in a few groups containing a sibilant or r in somedialects'. The germs of the* tendencies whicht* resulted.Hnto this assimilation are found in the observations of the Prati£akhyfes'«egarding?the jminutfychanges suffered tin -.quality and quantity ?by a,conson ant on account of its happening to be in^ the, vicinity- ofVothers. These observations^ though conflicting among, themselves on many" points, clear the ground for explaining'almosf all changes actually noticeable in MI or subsequent dialects.**'A number of these differences must be held as dialectal for the changes to which they could have given" rise are also * dialectal in ML '§149. The following statements based* on 'those, of the PratiSakhyas or on general principles of Phonetics have a use ful bearing in explaining the development of PI consonant- fgroups in Panjabi and other languages:—' ' *J.-..--->rr (1)" In a group stop -flstop preceded by a vowel, the first stop was unexploded i. e. it consisted of on-glide- and occlusion only and lacked release or explosion — the characteristic^ o£ a j&top whicli: marks it as a distinct? sound1;:. Unless exploded a stop is seldom recognised by the hearer though'the speaker may be conscious of its individuality on account of the:'speciaLeffort made in its pronunciation. It is Jience, natural that such stops should haye .gradually lost their individuality and] shoulpl have I (I) AV Pratis* 143,44. tq^RftOTqirfilftaro tffen fe l 67 been assimilated to those folio I H?$ 150. In groups stop -f the] stop|was not unexpioded2 because the next sound being more open3 a parjtia' release took place whictf was enough to mark and preserve the individuality roi' the stop. The stop, therefore did hot suffer assimilation to the following sound. But rthere are some appa rent exceptions to it, viz* -ty->*-cc.-,'-dl-> -U-, -dv-> -bb. and -ts- >-cch-o They are easy to explainlif.we consider the way in which each separate-sound was formed. , » •• CO. -ty-> -cc- t was formed byr closing 'the air passage with the spread tip of the tongue at^the,teeth on their rootf. In pronouncing y the contact is made with the two edges of the middle of the tongue upon the palate3, the central part remain-j ing open to allow the'air to escape through the narrow slit form ed ''by raising the front of ^he tongue so as nearly to touch the hard palate''.6 c alsoliad the same place- of articulation as v. It is not clear :whether c was^n affricate or a simple stop in the times of the* PratiSakhyas. Prof.* MacdWeit "thinks they (i.e., palatals €, and|) were affricate; but then ProfaiWhitney questions why they, were no^ described,as such-; by the Hindu phoneticians., andswhy they did, not makeTa; heavy syllable ^with MI, a preceding short vowel. -The answer to • these objections-Hs the fact that.the stop element in them was oasingle length* and not double as in groups stop+consonant. *. Foui a: similar reason kh, ghjetc, were described as single} sounds Jnot making |heavy (1) It is interesting to note, that in Skt. no word begins with, an unexpioded stop. The difficulty on the part^of the hearer in recognising an unexpioded stop can be easily demonstrated*by a nonsense ^dictation t.e, by dictating • meanirigless words tb a number of persons.. It vwill be; found ^that most of theniwill fail to hear the unexpioded stops correctly.. ,.. (2) "* Inference from A "WPratiS I. ..44. . , ) (3) in nasals the explosion of the preceding stop found its way through the nose. J (4) XA VPratis. I 24, Taitt.PratiS. II 38. (5) Taitt. Pratiis II 40. JH(6) ID. Jones: English Phonetics § 356 |j | } 91 • HIM T III IT68 TI IIS TIIIWH syllables with a short vowel before them. From the above con siderations it can be seen that it is easy for the tongue to go from the position of t to that of y without exploding the former. The t thus becoming unexploded lost its distinctiveness and moved on towards the position of y till the whole resulted in cc-. The resulting sound is double after a vowel because in that case t is double on account of its forming the first member of the group t+y. This also explains why the resulting sound was unvoiced and not voiced. The t being longer prevailed over the fricative y in devoicing it. Similarly arose'-jj- from -dy-, -cell- from -thy- and -jjh- from dhy-. (ii) -dl->-11-. The formation of 1 resembled that of d in having a contact of the tip of the tongue at the teeth, but differed from it in as-much-as in its case the air escaped at the sides of the tongue.1 The d being followed by the contact for 1 at the same place was, therefore, unexploded, and 1 being a liquid and more sonorous sound prevailed upon d in assimilating it. (Hi) -ts->-cch-. A similar consideration as for-ty-will explain this change also but with this difference that we might have expected -ty- to result in a palatal -cc- ie. -ttj, and ts in a dental -cc- i e. -tts which later on became palatal. Sir George Grierson's conclusions about the different pronunciations of palatals in MI and Mod. I. seem to have some bearing on this point.* ' i Why -ts- resulted in an aspirated -cch- and-tyin an un- aspirated -cc- seems to rest upon the sibilant in -ty- being not so strong as in ts-because in the former case the spirant was only the devoiced form of y while in the latter it was original. (1) See Whitney's remark on Taitt. Pratil. II 42, and A V Pratis* I 24. (2) "The pronunciations of Prakrit Palatals." JRAS 1913 pp. 291—98.J fj { 1 I 1 1 69 The strength of an original sibilant maybe inferred from the fact that it appreciably aspirated a preceding stop1. . The effect of a sibilant in aspirating the changed group can be judged from an anonymous quotation in the commentary on the Atharva Veda PratiSakhya I. 10 rendered ;thus by Whitney— 'They (first mutes) are known as 'seconds' when combined. with the qualities of jihvamuliya, 6, s, s and upadhmanlya " Here one may also compare the Panjabi pronunciation of Persian and English fricatives—unvoiced fricatives become voiceless aspirated stops in Panjabi while the voiced fricatives appear as unaspirat- ed voiced stops. One of the members of a consonant-group after a vowel in PI was always double.2 This is the reason why the resulting group in MI also is double between vowels; thus -ks- in PI was -kks- and hence became MI -kkh-, Similarly PI-$k-=skk-> MI rkkh-, PI -sm = -smm->MI *-mmh- though represented by -mh- in writing. The metre shows that -nh- -mh- in MI should be pronounced,-nnh-,-mmh- respectively. It is only then that a preceding short vowel could make a heavy syllable. Otherwise the group -nh-, mh would simply be an aspirated n, m. Sub sequent development of MI nh into nh in WP analogous to nn> n(n) also proves it. No doubt a single k, g followed by h fi make an aspirated kh, gh. It is for this reason that an initial PI k§—>MI kh and not kkh-. (iv) To account for -dv-> -bb-, we may assume that v was closer here than elsewhere. Hence it first became b and then assimilated d. cf. ASokan dbadasa for dvadaSa.8 §151. In other cases the double consonant of the group assimilated the single one, thus nd- > -nn- as attested by the kharosthi documents from Central Asia belonging to the first'or (1) Whitney on AV Pratil II 6, Traitt. PratiS XIV 12-13. (2) AV PratiS I 58, III.28, 30-32; Taitt. PratiS 1-7, 9-28. Whitney's Skt. Grammar §§ 228-29. - (3VGirnar III 1, IV. 12. i 70 seednd century A.D., *and the present pronunciation of many dialects of the N.W. including Panjabland; Nepali.' -ry- > -jj-,J -hy- > '-jjh- for rand h were never doubled in groups {AV PratfclU 31). i ! In a groiip ^nasal+nasal the first is assimilated to the Second because the first was in a way unexploded as nasals also are reckoned amongjstops. The double consonants' thus! produced from PI consonant- groups have remained double in Panjabi except (1) when falling in an Tinaccented syllable, or (2) when* final1 and preceded by a long vowel. A group consisting of nasal 4- consonant un,der these conditions lost its ;nasal, tgiving the nasality to the preceding vowel. '; i j . $152. Stop+stop. 1. Homorganic groups remain unchanged except the voiced aspirates which lose their aspiration vand raHer therpitch of the neighbdtfring vowel (seeH87). -kk-: kukkar (kukkutd-% chikkT(chikka), cikna *(cikkana-) but 6t cikkar 'mudV -gg-:guggal\guggulu-).j ^ J ||, *cc-:* ucc&rna (uccarati); uccarna (uccatati) but the trans. rm [ucerna Jpoints to ^uccitati; fkhicri (khicca)|cf. Guj. khicl; IbutWPlucca (ucca-).J '^M WL •. I ill H t.Jii '__^_^ cch-tkacchu (kacphapa-), gucchai(guccha-),|kacch |(kaccha:!kaksa), picchj(piccha), pucchana" c(prcch£ti)jbactiauna (viccftaclayatij, WFpucch'tut Ludh. puc& (puccha).. ^ -jj-:lajj (lajja). lajj (rdjju-), kajjal (kajjala-^sajja 'right' Opposite to left' (sajja- 'readyJ), bhujjana (bhrjjati). ..^ %%--; haft, (haft a-), bhatt (bhatta-)(cl\ ,H. bhat; pattf (pa^a-) kuttana (kuttayati),ghattana (ghattayati MBh. VI 2894 B). • $$- fv$rft besides uj-na? (u<&ayati), ha,$$ (*ha -tt-: uttarna (uttarati), tittar (tittira-)' latt; (latta), matta (matta-), P^ta (pitta-), citt (citti-), khitti (kr'ttika), bit[t] (vitti-). 1 I 1 I I • HP 11 I-dd-: kudal (kuddala-). 11 11 9 J] I 1 111 H 1 -ddK-:WahaT%iddha-),..buddh ^(buddhi-), ^ WP. baddha (baddha-). . ( -pp-: pippal (pippala-), pipla mtil (pippali-). §153. 2. In Heterorga^ni^grpwps the first stop is as3imilated to the second, and where one of the stops is a voiced aspirate the resultant loses the aspiration with thejis^ual J;one-e fleet. \k-: chikka, chakka (sajka-). -tk-: ukkarna (utkirati)^ sakarna (satkarayati). l , :tkh : ukkharna (*utkhrfati), .iil£khal 'mortar'? (*utkhala-) cf. khala- 'thrashing floor*. * -<|g-: khagga 'a fish* leaf of.ghjkuar which resembles sword- blade (khadga-). -dg-: uggarna (ndguratO, , uggana. (udgata-), ugamna (udgamyate). , \ • \ [dgh-: ugghayna (udghatate), uggh[a] j' fame,. famous ' (udgha-m. excellence, model; udghosa-?). -kt: bhatta (bhakta-)^ sattii i(saktu-)f motti (mauktika)- ratt'blood'(rakta-). jsrpt-i.satt (sapta-)* tatta (tapta-)- sutta (supta-). -kth-: satthal (sakthi). * ':f -bd-: sadda (Sabda-). -gdh-: duddhj (dugdha), daddhana (dagdha-). -bdh-; laddha (labdha-), jaddha (yabdha-). -tp-: upajna (utpadyate), WP upparna (utpatati, utpa^ati?). -tph-: upphanana (*utphaijati). -dbh-: ubbharna (udbharati). §154.H Stop hNasal. (l).In a group guttural fn or m, the nasal is assimilated. II I 1 I 11 !• • ^^^B BM fl B(l) The existence2 of ajverbpkhitati: khetati, perhaps formed from kptta- 'cut' in the seftse'of ^separating* is proved by other forms als) e.g. Panj.^akheyna,'to separate,' bakh^a ' quarrel0./ j J (* .'5J ^_ ^^•ITMM^^^H I 72 -kn-: mukkana (Pkt. mukka- <*mukna-; mukt-). Pischel assumed #mukna 'to explain' Pkt. mukka-(§506)but Bloch objects to it (§94). Turner supports the former (G-uj. Phon. § 76); sakna (Saknoti o r Sakyate). -gtt-: agg (agni-) bhugga 'worn out' (bhugna-), nanga (nagna >nagga- AMg., nagga1: *namga-), Ambala bhaggana. (bhagna-), laggana (lagna-or lagyati). -km-: rok'cash money* (raukma- 'golden') the only word containing -km that appears in Pkts, is rukma- and all its deriva tives show -pp-. Rukkinl occurs once in Jfvananda's edition of Nagananda (Pischel § 277) * -gm : jug'pair'(yugma-). (2) In the group jn the j was assimilated; the resulting nn- became n [n]- in EP. and -nj in WP. janeaU, WP. janju (yajnopavlta ) nal- perhaps goes back to rajanl, WP Guj. Mar. rani favours this hypothesis. an (ajfia) Pkt ana is an instance of simplification of double consonant with compensatory lengthening of the preceding vowel. For rani and an cf. Turner JRAS. 1924 p. 574. Sain (smjna); Pa. sanna (cf. Pkt. sanna). >*sann>*sann > sain on account of the following nasal. See § 30. (3) -tn->-tt- H. Saut. (sapatni but P. saukkan?) Ratti "short form of the personal name "Ratan may be equally refen*ed to ratna or raktika. -tn->kk? f (?) arak (aratnl), saukkan (sapatni)? -dn->-nn- This change goes back to PI. cf, bhinna-, chinnd- anna- etc. WP. runna P.P.P. of rona 'to weep' may either point to #rudna > *runna- or be a late analogical form. (4) -tm>-pp-: ap (atm£), apna, WP apna (atmanafc) -dm-> bb-: pabban (padmini), pabb "forepart^ of the sole of the foot" (padma) ? 73 §155. Nasal 4- Stop. In its treatment of the groups nasal + stop, FanjabI ranks with the North-Western languages, Sindhi and Lahndi, and with some Paharl dialects as opposed to the other IAVs. In it the unvoiced stops after the nasal are voiced while the voiced ones are assimilated to the nasal. The result ing voiced aspirates, whether stops or nasal, bring about the usual tone-changes after losing their aspiration. That this change is very old, in one dialect at least, is proved by its occurrencein the kharostfci documents from Central Asia (Bloch J. As. 1912,1 p. 332fT). In Eastern PanjabI,however,-ng^- 'n^h)- remain unchanged and in several other cases assimila tion is avoided perhaps due to the influence of Hindi. For disappearance of the nasal or its reduction to nasality of the | previous vowel see Nasalisation and denasalisation §§111-19. -nk-: ang (anka--), augur (ankura-), kungu (kunkuma-), nasang (niSSanka-), sang (Sanka), kangan (kankana-) pahlag (palyanka-). -nkh-: sangh (sankhS,-?), plgh (prenkha), sunghana (*£rn- khati V. 0. J. VIII p. 35), unghana (unkhati), H. sQghna and Qghna point that the change is very early. -ng-: ungal (anguli-), bhang (bhanga), sing (s^nga-), rang ranga-), canga (canga-), pingala (pangu-). In EP these words are distinctly pronounced with ng while m WP nn is commoner They are, however, spelt both ways in dictionaries. -ngh-: jangh (j&ngha), langlma (langhate). -nc-: panj (p&nca), manja (manca-);sinj*na (sincdti) kunji (ktincika), kanj or kunj (kancu-), kunj (krunca), cunj (cancu-). Lah. vanj°na, v&ina S. van°nu (v&ncati). -nch-: hQjhna (unchati), pQjhna (pronchati) Pkt. pupcbai, H. pschna, puchna). • -nj-: munj (munja), anjan (anjana-). pinjara (panjara-), pinjana beside pinnana * to card cotton? (pinjayati 'to kill'), bhanuana may be a contamination of bhaniati and bhinna-. 14 -njh^: sanjh (sandhy&: Pkt.samjha shnjha), banjh'(vandhya:- Pkt. vaiiijha, vanjha.) -#t-: kantfa (kantafca-), ghand (ghanta-), bandana (vantate), cun (1) ^JF^Wi *&&: sM**|!l AV Pratis. IT 9 "After n, n and n are;inserted^k. t and t before 6, S and S." fr«KTOFT *!%& 3TOT:|| AV Prat'S II10. 'Before, §, n becomes n." ^p: *%K: STTOT*:I| Taitt. PratiS V 32. "After n is inserted a k before s and $ " ^^hK^jiH Wttt'- II lb. V. 33 "After t or n is inserted a t." Whitney's edition and translation. (2) cf. the general tendency of Panjabl Pkt. to voice- an un-t] voiced stop after a nasal consonant. 77 (unaspirated). Following this Pers. [S] sometimes appears ss ch especially in iffitarate speech, but the normal change is s. If the sibilant had been voiced it should have appeared as j, and not as J ' m£: banjh, WP vanjh "pole for propelling a boat" (vamSa-) bSs'bamboo' is a loan from Hindi, sanjhl, sijh (samsa) cf. sina sSzhu 'half of land produce*. The numerals blh, tih, come from Pkt. visav, tisai and not from Skt. vimSati. trimSat. dassanais from daSyati, and 4ang 'bite' from *dakna> AMg . cjakka- > * (Jamka. cf. H. o!a% 78 lated with the usual tone results if the stop is a voiced as* pirate. -ky-:manak (manikya:) , chikka (gikya-) cf. Guj. glku sakna (gakyati or Saknoti), sak 'relation* * (svakya-),, -khy-: pakhana (prakhyana-), W P. akhan, akhaun (akhyana-) akhya-pana-). -gy-: bhag (bhagya-), suhag (saubhagya-), laggana (lagy- ati), barag 'feeling homesick, said of children' (vairagya-). 1 -cy-: pacna (pacyate)1, rucna (rucyate), cuna (cyuta-), bacna, cf. "WP. vacauna (vacy&te.) -jy-: Jeth (Jye'stha ). raj (rajya-), banaj (vanijya), bhajj jana (bhajyats), bhujjana (bhrjyate). - ty : phatna (* sphatyati: sphatate), ghat tana (*ghatyate: • gha^tate: ghatate), $utfana (trutyati). -4y-: Powadhi ja (1) For shortening the double consonant after a short vowel in the roots pac, rue, sak phat, tap aad in a number of.other WQX&s, see §121 (6). T , . , TO (4) The treatment of n+y is not quite definite. In some words the y is assimilated and in others it 'becomes j. The former seems to be the proper development in E.P« sunna, WP. stmja (£uny&-)» jann, WP janj (janya) cf. Mar J janavsa (j&nya+vasa); kannea K, WP Kanj (kanya) dhan WP dhai, perhaps, for dhan Mhanj (dhanVa--); mannan, fmanyate), neafa, (anyakara-?). [M] anj (anya-). (5) In tn+y:'the-y is assimilated- ; • uggamna (udgamyate), ghummana (HD ghummai: *ghtmryai). (6) In l-f:y, the y is ^assimilated but in many cases the result ing -11- seems to have been aspirated at some stage, probably before Apabhrainsu, for we find its traeeslin several languages at present. For l\Iarathi see Bloch §148. Kallh, H. kalh (kalya), pahlag (palyanka-) etc. For'further examples and exceptions see §§ 128-29. I (7) In v+y, the y was assimilated and the "resulting W be came bb in EP, but remained vv in WT?. Sindhi treats this group differently in the initial position from the interior one. "bagh (vyaghra-), sarbah, sirblh (Panj. sir+Skt. vyadhi*).a- (8) In sibilant+y, the y is assimilated and the resulting'&,§ ss fall together with ss. -sy-: nassana. (naSyati), dissana (drSyate), saula (Syamala-). -sy-: russana (rusyate), tussana (tusyati). -sy-: sala (syala-"), Mssa (hasya-), hasna. (hasyate) or per haps a loan from Hindi but the latter goes back to Pkt. *hainsai- alas (alasya), kassi (kaipsya). (9) In ry, hy, the r and h are assimilated'because they are never doubled in a group (see § 151). tThe resulting yy becomes jj but in the case of hy it is aspirated 'for h, also, like S, S, s, when assimilated, aspirates the resulting double consonant. ry-: kaj (karya), WP pujjana (puryate) EPpuggana may be an; analogical formation, after bhajj Ambala bhagg; bhijj: I Ambala bhigg. 80 i -hy-:gujjha (guhya-). bajjhg (bahyatah), b5jh (*uhya- :Pkt. vojjha), dajh (*dahya-). WP dajjh"na (dahyate). §162. Groups with r. In EP all groups containing r assimi late the r to its neighbouring consonant, and when it precedes a dental stop it often has the cerebralising effect besides assimi lation. In WP which has a greater affinity to North-Western dialects, the group consonant 4- r behaves differently from the group r + consonant. This difference of treatment was much more prominent in Anoka's time as shown by a comparison of the Shahabazga?11, mansehra and Girnar versions with those of Kalsi, Dhauli and Jaugada. The group consonant + r was preserved while the group r 4- consonant shifted its r to the initial consonant, doubling at the same time the consonant left single, or transposed its piace with its own member so that the result in either case was a group consonant + r; thus we get dharma- > dhram(m)a-, sarva->, savra-1. InWP. (also in Lah- ndi and Sindhi), the groups consonant -f-r, especially dental stops -f r have remained unchanged, and the groups r -+ consonant in wo rds beginning with a denial stop have shifted the r to the dental stop after doubling the other member. This latter tendency of shifting r is noticeable to some extent in Prithiraj Rasau of Cand.2 Consonant + r: — kr: koh, S. kohu (kr6§a-) kol, S. koli (krocle,) cakk (cakr&-) cukka (cukra-). suk (gukra-) recorded by Maya Singh must be a loan from Hindi or quoted from the Adi G ranth. gr: gatttana (grathnati) g€ha (graha-), agga (agra-), jagna (jagrati). graihn 'eclipse' is a ts. gas 'mouthful' is a loan from Hindi, grah is a loan from WP; gras usually used in gau gras 'portion of bread set apart for cows' is a ts. grau or gra 'village' is a loan from WP the common word in EP being pind. (1) Michelson: J AOS Vol. 30, 31. Hultzsch: A&oka's Inscriptions—Grammatical Sketch. (2) dhram(m)a- for dharma in the passage quoted by Beames in his Grammar. I p. 15, 8i v •- ghn bagh (vy aghr a -). ** ** * r j*— « r» #*' »* jr.* bajj 'calamity' 3(v£jra-), > 1 tjhr: ml^dha (m5c >). V tr: tahna, WP trahna (trasayati), tsrna WP trorna (trotayati got, WP gottar (gotra), citta WP (citraka-,) cittana, ~WP cittarna (citrayati), C§t, WP cettar (caitra-), dohta WFdBhtr (dauhitra pott WP potr pautra-r) putt WP puttar (putra-), patt, WP pattar (patra--)* sut WP sflttar (sutra-) datti WP datri (&£ than WPtrcii.to Pkt ti^i) ^tyayah-). Guj. tran may be contamination for the two. r after a dental stop does not causey cerebralisation. | In tuttana it is due to the following -tt- ef. WP. truttana. Similar may be the case with fatt** WP. tratti, In cit$a 'white'* (citr&:) form with cerebral chosen as from some other dialect to distinguish it from citta 'leopard.' ^ T» utr-: 8d, WP andar (antr&-) etc. See §112 (c). dr: damm (dramma), dakh (draksa), chiddd WP cltfdra chidra-), dadd WP daddar (dadru-), nid WP nindar /nidra). Lvdahna, if from draghate, dr 4ias become d. For -ndr-, -ndhr- * "J * *~ see § 15. J dhr: -giddh {gr'dhra-); baddharl beside baddhi (vardhra-) fcnd. *idhra. in 'sidhra pudhra* 'simple* (sidhra) are loans from WP. y;m "<"•.:• J. ) ' • -~~ pr: pauh (pra,bh&), pohan (pravahana-), pauna t(pra- payatiy. br: bahtnan (br aiimana-), kubba (*kubra-: kubhra) cf. Guj. kubdiU' - / bhr: bhai WP bhra (bhr&ta), bhaur (bhramara-), bhau (bhrfi- cf. Pkt. bhumaga, bhamaya Pischel § 124), bhatth (bhrastra-), bhauna (bhramati). ct t ( j rH . | *-l •. \ mr: makkhan (mraksana-). When' mr in an-internal yllable, a b develops between m and r, and' the whole group 82 appears as -mb in Pkt. (Pisch. §295)*, *amb (amra-), tamba WP tramba, tramma (tamra-), tamra (tamra+pa$a-?) j ,\ $r: saun (Havana-), mlssa (miSri*), WP mass (SmaSru), sass v(ivalrti:), cauras (caturaSra-)- For a$ru->anjh, injh. see [sunder-ms-§160, .••;,*' -. -v • ,. \ . §163."•'••'* r+consonant: ' '.';' ' • " ?-ric: akk (arkft-)', kakkar (karkara-), takkana (tarkayate), takkala: WP trakkala (tarku), makkar (markata-)', sakkar (iarkara). In WP trakkail in opposition to EP takkarl, 'the r after t is due to shift if the word is connected with the root ytark. WP srakk (but EP sakk) points to *garka- drabbh (darbha) ~ | r.$ :• -rm : kamra (karma), camm (carma), kaman (karmana) nimmal (nirmala ), WP. kummft (ktirm&-). I • *• «^ v $ •ry-: Dealt with under y-groups. ; , ' "'• • *'• ] rl-: dulls bridegroom'. H. dulha, Guj. dulu (durlabM-?)^] rv-: cabbana (carvati), caabl ;WP cabvl (c&turvimSati-) khabba (kharva i»*v Q 8O 44*; dassana (dariayati)', passa (parisv&-)f passall (pargu-) •rs-: ghassa. (gharsa-), khassana (karsati), WP vassag^ (varsati). baras. sarhS, arsl etc see under svarabhakti. {_ • ,i} . §164, Groups with 1. ^ * > : (1) In groups 1-fstop or m, 1 is assimilated . >& -lk-:bakk (valka-), sakk (^aria-). } 4g.; guggal (gtilgulu-)i phaggan (phal* ana-), b agga (valgu-).bag, WP vag (valga) perhaps a loan on account of -lp-: tappajr (talpv?), WP kappaui (kalpayati), -lb-; subb (£ulba) MW records Sulva, also hut -lv-,> -11-. -lm i gumma1 (gulma ). * « r,.: (2) In groups 1+y, y is assimilated with frequent aspiration. See* 128. ' '* ''" '' ". (3) In groups 1 -I-V,.d-Hl, and r+1, the 1 assimilates the other member. '"* - : • w" ^:^- 4v*: bil, bill in Maya Singh's Dictionary, (bilva). -dl-: bhala (bhadra-,.*bhadla) alia (ardrd -: *ardla-)Vkhulla 'low, base* (ksudra : *ksudla-), In J. Pkt;j"jchulla- culla- Pischel §325) !#.*. •rl-: dulla (durlabha-). * ' f • * v- • • * * * (4) -ll-;palla (pallava-), challl •maize-ear' (challi-). -See -ly- §128. ' ' ' * llrf; K § 165. Groups with v, ' • ^ •; (1) When coming after a guttural, palatal or Jcereb top, v is assimilated to the stop. - -kv-: karhua (kvathati), pakka (pakvd-) rjv-; jalua (jvalati). , | .-. . .v L \ • -tv-:khatt (khatva). • * .*• (2,)- J)ental stop +v had three developments in MI, viz. double dental, labial or j?alatal stops. (Pischel. §§29.3-300). In PaniabJ all the three have .their traces, but it is difficult to say which was proper to it." For mara$h|, See Bloch ^ 130. W si t K -w- >' -tt-r-ttan (-tvana-) a#in kurattan^bitterness', pal- attan 'yellowness*.- -t (-tva-) as in mitthat 'sweetness'; sat (satva-) may be a loan. ' -r ': * * •- x >ir%] tv- > -pp-: *[p]pan, -pana (-tvana-) as in kaurapan, lucca- pana etc. WP suhappan. -p (-tva-) WP suhnap£ 'beauty ', '.* *ppa (-tva-) as in budheppa 'old age*. ; ' • ; ',* -dv-> -dd-: do (dvau)1 and its derivatives dujja, duggaiia ^ etc. They can, also, be explained as coming from*duvati # dUV etc. *cf. Pkt. du- in compounds. Lat. duo. . .- ^ '«« t' * -•*- -dhv->-jjh-:, jhan^a (dhvaja+dauda Mar^ jhem V — bb in EP, and WP y batna, WP vatna (udvartana-) cf. H. uba^na, Sindhi uta^ii. # .#- (3) In groups v+y, r+v, and 1+tf, y, r and V are assimilated. See U9)",16r<7),(9)U64(3). t ' X-. (4) groups sibilant+v, v is assimilated *.v -£v-: sauhra (SvaSura-), sass (Svasrti-), sah (Svasa-), basah (visvasa-), assti (aSvina-), passa (par$V&-). *< v ' * • I * * % I -sv-:massi (matrsvasrka). v ,l ilV'***' j I %sv-: pasijjana (prasvidyate)'sxkr (svaka-:* svakya- sak f t> t kya-V are' £s,: c/. saka, H (sVaka S* f H •• 4 V *•# •^ *- (5) -hv-becomes -bbh^, iibh, poth. jibbh. (jihv 5Jb v» • • •* •" ••• §166. Groups with a sibilant. Sibilant+sto# » X* - ;;f(i) In groups sibilarit-l-stojj, the sibilant appears as aspifaHon A of the stop, the latter being doubied for-which see §-150J8).2»fi?) • -§c-: tircha; (tirasca), bicchu (vy'Scika-), piccha (paSca-), padchS (paScima-). * il -i ^ ;?c z -»i-: bikkharna, bakherna ftriskirati) ,^sukka 'dry' but snkkha *aj particular plant* Suska-)* pokkhar (pauskara-). " • ? ** & . ( "$t-» at^h (astau-), na^hitna (nastd-), mutth .(mu&il-), mittha (mista-), rit^ha (arista-), pi^hi (pis^a-). •••«-.-.. : • /; r.s^r-: utth, fit[h] (u's^ra-), bhatth (bhraftra-), WP, ottha (austra*).; i 01 . u :..••.'' Psi. -i L ^C >•;.>-.• -§th-: kottha (kostha-), kath (kastha-)^jeth (jy&stha-), s§th (Srestha-), gu^ha (angustha:-). -; . j : ;«sp-: bhaph- (vaspa-). . v .. •;.:*} "' - sk-: khammhi (skambha-),bakkhar (upaskara-)j bakhara (vakaskara-?). • ,.t -. * ^ -st-rthan (stana-), thammha (stambha-),tho?a (sjtoka), hatth (hasta-),mattha (mastaka-), patthar (prastara-), natth (nasta) attnamna (asta^?) . 7 " * *" '" ' ' -sth-: thali (sthall), than (sthagha-), thanl (sthaiufc-). sp\; phaha (spaSa-). ... ,. , ' ', -spn-: phuttana (sphutyate), pnoyna (sphotayati)." ^ , . -(2) In a group consisting of the final sibilant of a preposition and the initiai,stop of the following word, aspiration-does not take place. , ...... r .., ' - , .N |r, -S+c-: nacoyna (niScotate), nicia*(ni$cala*:). ,, " -s+k-: nikkalna (niskalati : niskalana- 'driving out' Gobh.), -nakamma (ni§karma-), c3.uk (catuska-).."?7, • ," -s + p-: naputta (nisputra-), cauppar (catuspata ), Guj. copan \-(oartuspanca^at).*; * j ^ ^ il ,v^-s+k-:nakk (nas+ka-)? r • •• -> * S [• •;[-. -sH-t-: nittarna but H. nitharna (nistarati),cauntr WP. cautti (catustriip^at). , :.•'•;. ;>. >,V , ,v_ ^107v. Stop^ibiiantc., u t; { v / /_ j;:^k!'^ • v (1) ks become k(k)h. .&.$.f, v^ -v ,-7 .^iilij:;; hzS&j khar (ksara-), khir (kslra-), khsh (ksu dha), akkh (ak§i, ikkh (ik|u) kakkh (kaksa-), kukkh (kuksl-). makkhi (maksika), pakkh (paksa-), sikkh (Siksa), takhan (taksanam cl. ace. of taksan) The words where ks appears as c(c)h are early loans from ^a ch dialect and appear with ch in other IAVs(Turner §89)? e. g. ricch, H. G^rich, Mar. ris V ch>s(rksa-), kacoh-(kak$a, kaccha), chura, with ch in others (k?urd-: churika), taccha beside takhan (taksati), macchar beside makkhi (maksa cf, AMg, macchiya), char beside khar (ksara-) i ^Fortikkha (tiksna-) see Turner § 89. tinnhana 'to prick, pr. would be a doublet from the same if it does not come from the [root ytrh cf, trnetfhu j *trndhati. (2) t or p+s become c(c)h. . j;t j. -ts-baccha. (vatsa-)> macch (matsya-) ussarna (utsarati) | goes back to Pkt. Guj. ucharvu may come from ucchalati. cf, nittarna (nistarati) for the different treatment of ts or-st when one member belongs to the root and other to the preposition* -ps-: accharS (apsar^) guccha (guccha-: gypsa-). (3) §n and, sn appear as nh- or n if there be another s, h in the word. tis (tr§na) may be a ts, from trSa, or cf.-tf?y&vat-BV vii, 103', 3. : ;.":" '- : • • • 1 -$$-: WP uuhala, hunala (u?aakala») •*• K "sn*': nhauna (snati),neh (sneha~),nhu (snus£). *•• (4) -sm-: sm-appear as-ss- (Turner § 55). i L -Sm-;rassi (rasmi-), Initially Sm-> m-: mass beside mucch ¥ 9 • (SmaSru-), masan (s*ma$ana-) is a loan'because of -£-'> -s-. -sm-: tusi (*tusm§), kossa (*k6*Sma), WP hussar (usma-) -sm-; asi'(asm£), bhass (bhasma) bissarna. (vismarati). This treatment is peculiar to the North-Western Languages cf. kaSir, K$ word for Kashmir (kalmira-). Ludh. amhattaf 'we and others'; tumhattar 'you and others' are loans from' H. They have not been recorded by Maya Singh, : -.^ ill i.'.'i. . (5) Sibilant + y, r, v, and r + sibilant have already: been treated under y-, r-, v- groups. .. :.. •...•„•;; ;;: .; i) si (6) toouble sibilants]becomej-ss-, or s-in unaccented syllables. i -5?-: nasang (ni&atika-).* I i?5__^_ *ss-: nissarnat (nissarati). §168. { Groups with h. | j a BL*1 V • I-hm- >Kmh :bahman (brtena9a-),here mh has again been transcribed as hm to denote the tone. It can also be; written] barahan. , ;' ' 1 ' J . Other h- groups treated under three of their other members/] Cerebralisation.8 - §169* The subject of cerebralisation has been dealt with \ by Dr.jBloch andlProf. Turner with respect ttoo | Marathi and SindhI pectively. | Thejlatter eludes J that [the j phenomenon jpjfc cerebralisation waslof a dialectal character, and that it was *he result not of a single change, but of different changes which formed a number of different isoglossesj(pj557y. E ^HI LI Examining thelcaseslwhere rfcnd thel chief cerebralising couldl havelexerted llhei fl ice, 1 we may [say. that nab is I a cerebral di The ordsMwhere cerebrals appear iijplace of JPII dentals mustlbelheldjaslloans from some ancient cerebralising dialect Jbe they J are pound with cerebrals in [ most J of I thelother non-cerebral i sing J cognate languages also.. | BJL 1 1 |J I §170.1 Examples of [Panjabi words containing: (0 Pi dentals Jprecededjat J a f distancelby {r.^Heref the dentals|remained ] dental! whichlsubsequentlyldisappeared. If they hadlbecome cerebral they should! have] appeared as r, rh, fi.e* r with a tone on vowels), bhal (bhr&tr-), marea. (marita ), r5n|(rodana), paihlla] (prathilla-, c./vprathama-). - **!$• JCLA* I H(l) A few casesjof a secondary chatfge of MI -ss- >"•«: > h are found e.g., dihna dissana (dySyate, Pkt. dissa'i,. disa'i). s>h is yet a living tendency. See Dr. Bailey's .note JRAS. 1926. 2. Bloch §§108—109. Turner: Cerebralisation in Sindhi JRAH 1924Upp. 555-S4. For cerebralisation- in Vetlic 'and Sanskrit see Wacker-nagel i. pp. 167 ffllllUlytJM JB3 I II Ml I H1:88J III IIIIIB '•For: gatth(f)^ gandti(i)V parh, :"paratts(s)y :see burner pp.560—61. /- - ---• •'-, >-; - : ?i (ii) PI dentals preceded immediately- by r. These remained dental which, if STngle, disappeared later. , ' gbeo (^brta-), hJS (hrdaya-,), khitti .(fcrttika) ,m5ea cf. H.mua (mrti ), pohllo (prthula-), tijja, tia (trtiya-), kitta, (krtd the-t-being doubled, or-tt-being added by the influence of sutta,, tatta etc.). bugMba H. burha, S. budho commonly derived from vrddhd- should be referred to brdha- where the -dh- has been doubled on the analogy of Pkt. daddha-. Pa* • • • vuddha- beside "buddha- and vaddha- may be due to contamina- • • • • tion of vrddlia- and brdha- mitt' (mrttika) "is 'found with cerebral in all except Mar. m&tl. : (Hi) r-fdental.' The dental remains dental. '•> v -rt-: All Panjabi words containing PI-rt- are connected •1 with the roots kartati'to cut* and krnatti 'to spin', and v&rtatg •to be' and 'to roll.' Where doublets appear, one has (he dental and the -'other'the cerebral to keep distinction of meaning. Thus kattana 'to spin*,^kattana 'to cut*; bat 'thing, matter* (vartta), bat1 road'^vartma-; vartih n.). For details* see Turner p. 562). • mrttika > ?.';jnitji H. matti, matt M. mati, Dog. mitti dental. n -rthv. sath (sartha), satthi (sarthika-), cauttha (caturtha) -rd-: gadha . (gardabha-), kuddana (kurdati), caudS (c&titfdaSa), baddal (vardala ), bahld (baliv&rda-), paddana (pardati). .;r.,/*\, -f* , • "- T -rdr: l*addMardr&), alia (*ardla). kau£ 90 i Svarabhakti. §172. Examples: ofUvarabitaktt are fairly common in Prakrits (PiseneP §§131-40) wherev they probably represent tatsamas or late borrowings from Sanskrit after the tendency for assimila tion' had died* out. Mediaeval and Modern languaget3uwB s contain even a greater number of examples of svarabhakti in tatsama Words. A few cases of svarabhakti are noticeable, in Panjabi which *1 in other respects seem to be tadbhavas, e.g., sarahna, WP salahn.a, in rapid speech &rah-, slah- (*Sraghate: Slaghate, cf., ~\Z&raXh: V&ath). Other words like garau, WP girt or garaV (g*ama ), bh^a, WP id.^JU bhira (bhrata), g<*rah, WP id., L. girah (grasa-) are loans from a* Western? daalect (probably WP). HP* gas (grasa ) is a loan from Hindi. §173. The Panj. prefix pay- meaning * secondary ' as in parbals(*pravala-j, paydand (*pracfanta-), paychattl (*prachatti-), or * one degree'further removed*' as in parfltta (prapautra-), parnamia, pafdadda etc., is rather difficult to explain. It may perhaps'be better connected with prati-. If it is really a case of Svarabhakti from pra-, then why does r cnange to r? §174 In the following, words, svarabhakti goes to Prakrit! barb*, barha, WP varh- beside vass-, varha (varsati, varsa,, cf. AMg. varisa-),*sarh5 (sarsapa-, of. AMg. safisava-)<•bar«s 'year*, to rain - and arsi (adarSa*-, Pkt. arisa-) are loans from Hindi on account of the preservation of *s^. Insertion of* Plosives. §175. It sometimes happens that between the nasal n or nt anot the following r or 1, a voiced plosive of the same class as the nasal, is inserted. A few cases of this kind are found in Panjabi. 4 -nar->-ndar-: bandar (vanara-), pand«r§ (Pkt. pannaraSa-), basantar ' fire' perhaps through *basandar (viSvanafa- cf. 91 vai^vandara- found in the Siyadoni inscription of the 10th century A.D., Z.D.M.Gr. Vol. 47 ,p. 576). The change -ad->-nt- may have been due to the influence of'basant (vasanta-) is. The tendency is found m later borrowings, e.g., hundar, hudar beside hunar (Pers. hunar). .-mr->#-mbr>>-mb-: This change is found in Pkt. also cf.^Ls- chel?§295. amb (amra-, Pkt. aijiba-), tamba (tamra-, Pkt. taipba , Aiikan taijibapannT); H. bibl or bambl (varan, cf. valmlka). Panj.. barmi may be a tatsama with metathesis. Ambansar whether connected with Amar 'the third Sikh Guru', or with amrat, amart, ammart' nectar ' i(am'? ta-) ts. Becently the change ihas taken place in Persian loanrwords e.g. amblr, ablr or amir (Pers. amir). -ml- > Pkt. -mbil- > -mbl- or -ml-: imbll or imtt (amlika) cf. J. Pkt. -amba , antbila- from amla Pischel § 295. * In taisamas a plos've is inserted between anusv&ra,and h; e.g. singh (simMJ. / Insertion of; r. §176. The N. W/ languages Sina, Kashmiri, Sindhi, Lahndi and Western PaojabI have preserved some consonant-groups •in which rformed § thabba (stabaka-)? uppar, H. upar (upari, cf AMg. uppim beside uvariin), assl. H. id., (a^Iti-). The case of ikk, L. hikk (6ka-) is puzzling. In 1?kt. we get skka- and ikka- presumably for ekka- from which the expected form in Panjabi would be ek as in Hindi, Gujratl and Marathi. cf. Panj. H. G. khet, Mar. Set (ksetra-, Pkt. khgtta-, khitta-). In Iranian also the initial vowel was not i. Metathesis. §178. Metathesis is common in words borrowed from Persian and especially in the mouths of illiterate speakers, thus kaccu, cakku (caqu), nuksa, nuska (nuskha),. kajak, (kagaz), dejka (dggca), bujka (buqca), nuskan (nuqsan) etc. From Sanskrit words the following may be noted:— bait oh, banish (vartula+loha-), hamel 'necklace * (mekhala-?), ciyba 'flattened parched rice', H. civya or citira (cipita-), kaujra, H. karva (kafaika-), WP partoh, patroh (putravadhu-). Contamination. . ' §179. Sometimes two words of a similar meaning so .combine as to become a new word, e.g. palettha or palo^tha (Panj. paihlla+jettha), palSs (Panj. pal+pos), mha-is (Panj. maih+H. bhais). -•.':. Onomatopoesis. >•••' §180. ' There is quite a large number of words whichrdenote some sort of noise or motion All of them seem to be oriomato- poeic though some are connected with Sanskrit ;or even Vedic words which again are most probably onomatopoeic. Two termi- nations are chiefly used in forming such words and are perhaps connected with the PI verb karati. (1) —k as in karak, khapak, garhak, dharak, bfiarak, bhurak, marak, jhirak, rirak, tarak, tirak,|pharak, rarak; sarak (sarati)j 9S khurakJ surak, cirak, curak, ghurak; (kilak, bilakf (vilapati), tihlak, chahlak, cluhlak (dolayate); camak (camat), damak, lamak (lambate), dhamak (dhmati); faihk, baihk, saihk (Svasiti), caihk, buhk|( bukkati); cik (cltkara-) J phukj (phutkara-), j thukk (thutkara-),} cukk, |tukk tyate) Some d strictlyjdenote sound or motion. (2) -kar or -kar as in sukkar, Ihu hgar (hum) Jpukar|(put), hughar T(humkara-). kh&ghar (Panj. khaugh|'cough'), 4*aak&r orfta^hSr [tcek<.a: r].etc. Shift of Stress-accent. §181 A thlfu its has been (assumed |to|exist( in( Sanskrit [and(its( subsequent stages. As|regards its (place|in the rd. ProfessoaJacob of ima (ZjD. M|G. Vol.|47 4ff) developed by|Sir G G JRAS 1895.IZDMG. Volj49 pp. 401 ff) has been generally accepted upto now. iThis theory, however, remarkably fails in the case of words whose syllabic scheme in the Prakrit or ApabhramSa stage was x x x x x x x orjx xlxlx. Take for instance the words vao'ijyam (Pkt. va^ijjam w XJX) and tira^cd- (Pkt. *tiracchao] X f K* According to this theory the words H (should appear as."'Bp*| But we actually get. f* H. *banij tircha EP. *banijj tircha WPjLfvairjj tircha Guj.fvagij tirchs (1) denotes a short syllable, X a syllable heavy\by only and ja syllable containing]a long vowel. BBJ1 fl 1 n §182. A study-of such -words leads one to the conclusion 11M at soma time jprior to the compensatory lengthening of short vowels: in front of consonatit-groups in Hindi and Guj rati, a shift of jaccetnt topk place by which all words received accent on the initial syllable except those (containing long vowels .in their non- final syllables in which case the accent fell on the syllable contain ing a long vowel that was nearest to the final syllable. §183. That there was a ;Strong .tendency to accent the penul timate syllable£ome time about jthe ApabhramSa stage may ;be inferred from such foreign words as J. JSkt. Akabbara- (Pers. Akbar), suratrana- (Pers. sultan), turugka- (Pers. turk) etc. Detailed Examination. §184. (1) Monosyllables may be left out of consideration firstly because very few of them have survived,and secondly because the accent has kept the same place in them, there being no room for shift. §185. (2) Dissyllables, too, require little consideration be*- cause in their case what is the first syllable is also the penultimate. They have become monosyllables in Panjabi open or closed, and when the latter type ending in a neutral vowel becomes dissyllabic, the place of accent remains unchanged. yadi, Pkt. jav > EP je kati, „ kai > „ kaf, H. id. kara, „ kara > „ kar, H. id. Jkala, „ kala > „ kal, H. id. Guj. k&l. w X sapta, f„ satta > „ satt, H.G. sat. X — lajja, „ lajja > „ lajj, H. Guj. laj. ^x Ivala-, „ — > „ Ml, H. id., WP vaml. I I xl^ bandha, „ bamdha> „ bannh H. Guj. bidh. etc. etc. ^§186. (3) Among trissyllables $he schemes x^u x, and among tetrasyllables the schemes like * w ^xor those involving amatnraUy long syllable (—) after a syllable heavy by position 95 do not call for any discussion as here also, the* accent the same syllable according to the old and the new theo kdrati, [ Pkt. karai > EP kdre, H. Guj. id. * karanam, „ karanam > „ karan, S. k&ranu: lfl| ghata-, „. ghadao > „ gharay H. id. Guj. gharo x~£ kunda-, „ *kundao > „ kunda, H. koda, W l\ kunna ghanta-, „ *ghantia > ,f ghdndi^ H* ghati kala-, ,, kalao > „ kala, H. id. \S x^— x. palas"&-, „ palaso > „ palSh; I karpasa-, „ kappaso > „ kap&h, H. Guj. kapSs. afiadha-, „ asadho > „ harh, H. asirh, Guj. as£dh gopala-, „ govalo > „ gual, H. id. Guj. guSl |<— prasasati, „ pasarai > H. p£s(a)r§ x - -» *par&v£dat,r > EP parse o, parse, G. parsev (o) pur ana-, „ puranao > „ purana, E. id. x ^ - - carmakara-, „ cammayaro „ cdmea1!, H, camar eakravaka-, „ cakkavao- > „ c£kva. II. id. The expected form would be *cakv&, but that being the regular accentuation of causal verbs has shifted the accent from the final to the initial syllable. Moreover there is an overwhelming majority of words ending in unaccented final long vowels in Hindi, Panjabl Rajas than! and Gujrall. cf. sa-va- (*su£o W*X%) lohakara-, Pkt. loha^are > EP luhar, H. id. sltakala-, u sryaalo > „ se&l • x|- w - prakhyana-, „ *pakkhanao> „ pakhSna x _ w - w sambhalayati, „ saxjibhalei > „ samhaile, etc. etc. H. sabh&le". 96 §187. (4) The schemes explained by the new theory are those.whore a syllable heavy by position only falls in a non- initial position without being followed by a naturally long syllable. The final syllable, of course, is not taken into account, Such are the schemes x x x among trissyllables, and x x^x, ^ X x x or.x x x x among tetrasyllables. X X aniccha > Guj. anaeh X *} aputra- > EP. aut, H. id. | &ranya- > II. arna 'wild* alakta > EP. H. alta, Guj. ajt5 alaksja- > Guj. alakh alagna- > II. alag (Fallon's Dictionary), EP, alagg may have been formed from lagg, (Dgs\) kacjacchu- > EP, H. Guj. karchi " ^^^ karanka- > .Panj. karag (recorded in Diction- ;'. , aries). karan i 97 1 bahutva- > EP. bauht, #. WP. baiiut manusya- > WP infills 8 *maricya- > EP, H. mircc, WP marV t, Pkt. mahairita G. mehta H. maihta. a a J vauijya- > EP, H. bin j, WP., Guj. van j. varatrS- > H. barat, Guj. varat, S. varta. • I yahangifca- > EP. H., b&ihgl, WP vaihhgi' \T_ ] virikta- > S. virto 'tired' " *'" viricyate- > S. vircauu 'to be tired \ f m V :Xx] ."| vilagnar>[Pkt. *vilajpga-]>EP., H.bilag, S. virnino, * J Guj valagvii, WP vdlagaa. ) vilamba- > H. bilam, WP. vilam ?• vilambate* > WP. vilamba. yisamyate" > EP., H, bisamna. * " "sapatui > H. saut'co-wife*. ) saputra- ' > Panj. saut. - d- #Sarikkha- (cf., Pkt. sarikkh-, sariccha- Pischel $245). > Panj. H. sarkha, Guj. sarkhu. ba; Jil B Ml suruD&^ >. Panj. H. Guj. surag. in I sulagna- > Panj. H. stilagna, Guj. sajagvu haridra . :• > EP balhdvH, Midi, Gnj.hajad WPhardaJ. rpo v Jx — araghatta-^> H.; arhafo i&hat by early loss of Panj* hahtyby metathesis. ' i - * r I* balivarda- > EP bahld, bauld,; » » » — udvartana- > H. libfan; EP. bdtxia. WP vatua through •:•: an early loss of *u> J < f.;-;j xx— "I paryaiika- > Panj. pahlag H. nal&g cf. paiki. xxw—J paryasta-Pkt palladia- > Panj.J3al°tua, U. id. ***** *» §* * vij naptika. > H, biatL , ; "a sambudhyati > Panj. 8amjhcna, H. id. , lalyaka (P-kt. #sallaxnka-); >(EPsahlag. • X~- 1 kautumba-> Panj. ksyma x~—J dauhitra- > EP dohta, H. id., WP. dtotra, *> • *•* 9» *v dtfrbhtksa: >f;Hr" -dubnuk { **-*• V '• §188." Besides ihe* above .words there h is a number of grammatical formations which could not be, explained satisfac torily without the application of .the theory of accent-shift. They are: (i) Present Participles. ^ , ^ iW karant-,Pkt. karamta^ > Panj. k&rda, Po#i. k&rna, H. k$rta, Guj. karts. See also §§ 117^ and 156. I Lah. kafenda is from Pkt. kareijita-. I > „-- « - - («) Present Indicative-Ill pi. karanti> Panj./kiran see also §156. H. kar§, O.H. karahS cannot come from karanti. " • (tti) The s-_ future of Gujrati;, Rajastharl and Lahndf. kari§yami,-Pkt. Karissami >Lah- KarsE, Raj. karsyQ „ - Pkt. Karissam..> Guj. kariS, pronounced [TcAnJ], dialectical]y kiras. (?Y) The -b- infinitive of Eastern Hindi, and the -vu infini- tive of Gujrati. -*••'• ^ ; r Kartavyam, Pkt: kariawain) > E; H. karib, Guj;-karv€L §189. There are a few exceptions several- of which are com mon to Pan jabi, Hindi and Gujrati. They are probably late borrowings'-introduced 'after the tendency for accent-shift had died out, and the penultimate accent had come into existence once more for which see below §191* : J ' / # X xx x nil&ankam > Panj. nas&ng, H. nisank , I •* x xw— prasvidyate> Panj. pasijj*na, H. pasijna . prasvimia- > H/paslna, Grq. paslns, v .:..? ^^ angus$ha* >|Panj.|guMhaV aguttha, H, agu^ha, Guj. .. i .: ..' ... -••? ^: anguths? 4: • / * agni$tha.- > Panj; gftthl. SgfttM, H% ag*thi, Gtrj. id 99 niskarma- > Panj. nakaiiima, H, mfcanii^ Gu j.4iakamfi. I ni§putra- > Panj. naputta,^H. mputa -^ — -*-•;*-- manjis^ha> Panj. H majtfh, Gujr id, ^hePanjr^ord I 1 is evidently a- loan Ifrom H. fl^B- -'•--*fH of pracchaniati> Panj. paohan ,--• 1 w chStna, Guj. nhgtvfl.w.^M]T^^I^^Z~^Z^^ ^ ekastha-] Pkt. ekkaftha- > H. ikdttha beside ityhaj Pkt ekkalla-> H. akela beside ikla -v>5 ' — I Panj. kaftha kalla on :account of the-loss of a-_before I the shift of accent took pi ace v IB^^^HlflBi xl* karaatja- >JGuj. karancjo beside-Panj. H. karat- • *. M. > ^ **H_ _** (De£) varaiji(Ja-i>[Pan3. baran bavinja (52), V „H]b$van.H tavanja (53), » -w pajkattar (75), H. pichattar. sanhattar (77), H. sat attar. a$hattar (78),. ft. a^hattar. r •:Xxi Qther numerals of this decade, Pan;jabi.fhas a long vqwel in the secoad syllable, as an alternative pronunciation. ~ // // e. g kahattarl(71),lbahattar (72), tehattar (73), cuhattar - *-. (74),cheattar (76). Hindi has the short vow. el. * / m* <^$91. Recently PanjabI has, lost the tendency of accent-shift and has again developed penultimate accent thereby giving rise to schemes like X Qtc. Such words are chiefly (t) tatsamas, I TrS&M 1MJ SHI ,i , I (it) loans from Persian and English, or . (tit) words of unknown origin: (i) parsiddh, part akkh, basant, mahant, namitt, nakhiddh, bakunth, nactnt, pakhdncj, ad&mbar etc. : 4* if (if) pasind, patang, nagand, kamand, malang, pagambar* 0 ;:; tamanca; Sat&mbar, Dasambar etc. (tit) gbasfinn, ghainand, bharin 1 i .V '.': . - * • 4 »' • *• V.» N - • INDEX OF PUNJABI (LUDH1ANI) WORDS. I The diacritical marks and the infinitive sign -(a)=na of a root affeet the order. Bl. means that the other cognate forms are to be found under the Marathf word in the index to Bloch's La langue marathe. Other ^abbreviations are [1 H T B?IS1 Amb. Ambala District, Mul. Multani, D ogri, Pers. Persian, Gujrati, Poa. Poadhi, H. Hi n dl, Poth Pothohari, • K. Kangrajdialect, • S. Sindhi,! Ks.=Kashmiri, ?I= sina, L. LahndT, Pkt. PrakritJ M. Marathf, Skt. Sanskrit, Mai. MalwaT, Vedlm Vedic. The accent mark on PanjabT words represents thejstress, and that on Skt. words the pitch-accent. Where the pronunciation is not correctly represented by the transliteration, a phonetic transcript is added within square brackets, a v. pres. I sing.f unemphatic adda m. 'ginger'. M.Iale Skt. h& 'am', §133 ardra- 1 §15,1170 iii. Bl. ab£j /. 'sound' || Pers. avaz...._§52|addh mJ'half' |||M. adhaJ||;Skt ab6r /.J'delay', || Poa.]ber^|[Skt.Bardna- 111 1...... §170 iii. Bl. avela §143JV. Jadharam ] [e'kArom] m.]'impiety\ abh&gga J [9P Sd , entrail' W. P. andar,JaggeJo^?\ 'inlfront'llH.FafffillM M. fitHSkt. antra-. §155^162. Bl.f agya || Skt.* agra-kg...... §103 Bl! adambar m.I'ostentation' ts.|Skt. aggh (Lah.) w-H'price' Skt. adambara §191 l(i) argha- §163 102 agtir m. 'granulations in a healing ammS /. 'mother' || H. id, || Skt. sore*. || Skt. ankura § 155 amba 155 ainci /. 'inch1 U Eng. inch .._ §30 an /. 'prohibition ? order I' ||M. an ajj adv. 'to-day' || M. aj. Skt. Skt. ajna §154.(2) Bl. adya- §161 9.) . Bl. anach (G.) /. 'disgust' || Skt. akbanja= akvanja q. v. aniccha §187 akra (u) n (W. P.) m. 'proverb', anaj m. 'cereal' || H. id. || Skt. Skt. akliy&na- §52,161 annadya- — §5], 158 akhara=khara g. v. anam m. 'prize* ||Ar. in'am §53 akk m. 'particular plant' H. ak.lJandalw.I'egg' H|H. anda, || Mul. Skt. arka- .•-.... §163 anna,'eye-balr. || Skt. anda- akkh /. 'eye', || Amb. ankh IM...... §J 5, 155, i70lV. akh, s. Skt. aksk a ng m. 'mark' 11H. O ak.ySkt. §49, 113, 167 Bl. anka- §155.B1. akkhl adv. 'with eyes > pj^ angur=agur q. v. akkhihim §133 b anhera=nhera q. v. akvanja adj. 'fifty-one' || H. ik(y) anjan m. 'collyrium', H H. td.HSkt. aniana- §155 avan, M. ekavann. Skt. ekapaiicasat §135 190 ann m. 'food', || H. id. G.-[|Skt, alagg.a^'.. 'separate' H II. alag anna- §158 Skt. alagna- 187 annha adj. m. 'blind',||Amb. andha. a^i'w.1 'remedy' || Ar. Jilaj 53 [and°], [|PH. andha, adha Skt. andha- §155 alakh (G.) i unknowable' Skt. alaksya- k 187 ap pron. 'self'||M. ap, ||Skt. atma —is iztm* i ^49< 154 (4) B1 alas m. 'laziness' |i M. aalas || Skt. apna yron. 'own', W. P. apna, alasya- §161 (8) Bl. Mul. avda II H. apna= I Skt. alia adj. 'wet'; || M. alg 'ginger', atmanafc §22,154 (4) Skt. *ardla-§143,164,170 in. apparna (W. P.) v.u 'to reach' Bl. M.*upadni||Skt. utpatati ? :- alt a m. 'red dye' || M.|alta Skt. ^ " ..... §36 Bl. alakta- 1 ^^^^^§187 Bl aram m, 'relief 'HPers. aram_.„§52 am an m. I ' faith]'{U Pers. iman 153 arhat (H)w. Persian wheel ||Panj. haH.t,|!Skt.araghatta- ...... §187 amb m. 'mango' M. Sba. II Skt Smra- 22,p 62,175. Bl.l arind m% * bit ni. 'mean ^ M. camm m. 'leather'||M. cam||Skt vit Skt. vit 152 Bl carma- _ §137,163 Bl, bitth /. 'space'HM. vit,||WP cand m. 'moon' M. cSdllSkt 1 Skt §103 Bl candra- § 15 137,155 Bl. b5ih w.|'burden'||M. ojhg Skt.* canga adj. m. 'good'||H. id. Skt. hya-||Pkt vojjha-„„.§161 (9) Bl. canga- §155 108 caim=cand q.v. chatt /. 'roof' II H. chat IISkt. # cannan m. 'sandal' Skt. candana- chatti $137. $64 ch§,u /.'shade'* ||H. chayallM. caubi adj. 'twenty-four 'ft WP savll Skt. chaya ._ §137 Bl. cahvi, cavvi, cahvvi||M. covis ehe adj. 'six'ffM. saha||s. sa||Skt. Skt. caturviniasti-B— $163 Bl. §at(?) ~§27,144B1. caud§. adj. 'fourteen* . cauda eavda||Skt. caturda sa-HH chej /. 'bed'||H. Sej||M. §ej.||Skt. ) _.- 10J, 138, 170 iii Bl. sayya. _ $29 Bl. Cauggaua. adj. m. 'four times chella m. 'kid'j|M. seldu || Skt. Skt. caturguga- $163 chagala- §103,138 Bl. c&uk m. 'an open square||H. WP. chidda _ adj. m. 'porous'H WP. caukllM. cauk l| Skt. catuska- ehidra || Skt. chidra- § 166 Bl -§7,137,162, HO iv. caunti adj. • thirty-four > n WP. 109 cittlfetfdm. 'white'j|Skt. citra- dajjhnia (WP.) v.i. to be burtit' ... §162,170 IV |M. dajne||Skt. dahyate c&kkhaja dehftrd m. 'day' || M. dis||Skt. dittha (WP.) past part'seen9 divasa- §60 Bl. Skt. dr? ta- — §171 d$I/. 'used in girl's name' || Skt. ill A g&46a w. 'earthworm* || Skt. geha m. 'taking a thing forcibly gagdupada- __ §155 bkt. graha ]§147,162 gaggar /. 'water vessel'yM. ghag- g6ru m. 'red earth Ml id. Skt. garll Skt. gargara-: gargari- gairika- _ §103 Bl. ,<*«;; — §25,163 Bl. ghajrerrOD a m. 'petticoat' || Skt gajjana v.i. 'to . thunder' || M. gharghara ;ga»S||Skt. garjati Des. ghaggharam jaghanastha- __§ 137,163 Bl. vastrabhedah — §163 gijjar /. 'carrot'HSkt. garjara- ghail adj. 'wounded'HAVP. ghail __ §24,163 Skt. ghata- §101,106 gal m.'neck, throat'HgaJa || Skt. ghand m. 'Adam's apple'||H. gala- _ §137 Bl. ghftti'llSkt ghanta- gal/.'abuse'||WP. gahl||Skt. gali- 137, 155,186 ! • : —§i28 ghara m. 'jar'||M. jghada Skt. gallh /. 'cheek'||H. gal||M. gal ghata- §137, 138,(186 Bl. ' Skt. galya-? ga?da-_ H128 Bl. ghasoa m. 'rubbing'||Skt. gharSa- ganda adj.m. 'dirty* ||Pers, ganda — §163 _ § 135 ghattma v.t. 'to speak lowly ofl i ganda m. 'thread used as a Skt. ghattate — §161 charm'|| Skt. gauda- . §155 ghau m. *wound'||WP. gha||M. gan<}h [t] /. 'knot'flH. gfith[jSkt. ghayliSkt. ghata- granthi- _. §i70(t) _ § 103, 137,138 Bl. gandh°na v.t. 'to unite' 'mend'H ghe6 m. 'clarified lutter' ||WP. H*. gSthna 11 M. gi th ne 11 Sk t. ghiu||K. ghe|jH. ghi || M. ghi granthati §155 fSkt. ghrta- [§60, 97, 10 L, 103,137, 132 BL gandda = g&doa g v. ghin /. 'detestation'||Skt. ghyna gannl /. 'enlarged eyelash'||Skt. ga$di §137, 138 Bl. ~- '§97 garafi, gar&h = grau, grah q.v. gh6ra m. 'horse'||M. ghoda||Skt. g£rha adj. m. 'thick*||M. gadha ghotaka- Skt. gadha- '._„ §137,155 Bl. l„. §44, 103,108, 137, 138 Bl. gas m. 'mouthful' ||Skt. grasa- ghumm"na v.i. 'to revolve'||M. ghumn§||Des. ghummai §161 ; ...» §162, 172 (5) Bl. gatth [i] /. 'knot'||Skt. granthi- giddh m. 'vulture'||M. gidh||Skt. _ §170 (i) grdhra- gatth°na v.t. 'to unite, mend' Skt. ' _ §97,137,162,170JIV Bl. grathn&ti ...... §155,162 gijjhana v.t. 'to become accus- ge&r8 adj. 'eleven'||M. akra||Skt. tomed'HSkt.' gr'dhyati ekada§a -..- §55, 116,135-B1. §97,161 (2) 112 ginaiia v.t. 'to count'||M.Jgann§lgunah m.|'sin' Pers .J gunah JSkt. ga^yti, gj-nati §135 < , Z. §26,]108,140pl.|gurhaIa^.Bm.J fastI(colour) | gftthi /. 'fireplace'||M.pgti||ISkt. SktlgUdha- §15,138 agnistha- §25|189|Bl.^iitthaIw.I'thumb'||M.|aipgtha gohl/J'iguana'HSkt. godha^B J Skt. angtistha- -..-§137 [§51,166,189-BL g6hran]/. 'anuo'||Skt jguda + hadd m. 'bone'||M. MddaJhaddS; rand'ira- §15o athi /. 'stone of faff rait' Skt. gora \adj.\ 'white, fair'||M.f goru asthi-phad^a-M J132, 152 Bl. Skt. gaura- §15Bl.|hallm. ]'ploughj|| MjhaJ. I Skt gotlml'sub caste'HWP.JgottarllM. hala- 146 Bl. got Skt.lgotra- W halhdi /. 'turmeric'||M. ha}ad||Skt. 4J§137,162,|V70IVB1. ft haridra gi£i\m,. '.nouthful'iltjgira'i .65,128,143 («),ll87JBl. i\y gras'ISkt. &srrasa - ~-§'62Ih&lh«t wi. PersianHwhGel'IlM- grading ['eclipse' Sktjgralana^ i - • rahat II Skt. laraghatta-W • 1 - §162 _§187B1. grau m. 'village'||WP. grSJIJL. hamel /. 'necklace*|| Skt. m§khala(? gir§ M. gav. ||Skt. grama- (?) 911WII i H Iil Tl ~-^y 178 —P162JBl.Jhans m, goose||S. han^IJ Skt. gualla m.'cowherd'||M. gavliilSkt. hamsa - §160 gopala- __ §101,]186 Bl. JharanJa^t(surprised' 1 Ar. gucchajm. 'bunch'||M. guch,|ghos ftairan — §84 Skt. *grpsa- guccha-j harar /. 'myrobalan'jj WP. harfr T ...... §98,152IB1. M. hirdatlSkt. haritaki- guggal m. 'a gum used as insense' .1 §67, 146,170 /. 'slough-of snake* It Skt kas&ra 'm. 'brazier* II M. kasaf kancu- §28 Skt. *kamsakara- §103 Bl kamv' m. 'ear* M.Ikan'.H Skt, kasna v. t. 'to tighten* M: karna 1_ §137,163, Bl. kasne Skt. karfati kanna m. 'reed* ||Skt. kanda- -. §121(4) BL §15,19,155 kSssi /. 'bronze* || M. kas§ ||Skt. kannea 'girl'^^ , virgi^^^n Ml WP. kamsya- „_ §160,16L (8), Bl. kanj. Skt. kanyftM— §161 (4) kath m. 'wood' || M. kathi Skt. kannha m. ' shoulder * Amb. ka?tha- §19,121,137, 166 Bl. kandha||Skt. skandha- .~ §155 kattak m. 'N. of a month* WP. kantha m. necklace » WP. katte HSkt. karttifca- ..§22 kaintha ts. llSkt. kantha —§30 kattana v. t. 'to spin* || M. katno kap&h m. /. ' cotton * || M. kdpus Skt. kartati __ §170, Hi BL Skt.f karpasa- kattana vjf.fto cut' Skt. kartati §145,163,186 Bl. §110,170 m. kappana (WP.) v. t. 'to cut' ||M. katth a I adj.% adv. I'together *, k3pn§ Skt. kalpayatL... §164 BL 'united '] Pothlghattha Skt. kapp°ra m. 'cloth * || M a d ekastha- | _ §55,131,189 Skt. karnata- §64 BL katti adj. * thirty-one * Skt. karna v. t. .' to do]* 111 M.Jkarne' eKatrimsat §55,135 Skt. karati kauddi /. ' cowrie shell* If Skt. §15, 49,137,147 BL kapardika §103,170 hi karSffM. 'skeleton *|| Skt. karanka- kaul m. 'lily, flower* Skt. §187 kamala- §101,119 (2) 140 kara. tn. 'bracelet' || M. kadlljSkt. kaura adj. m. bitter Skt. kataka- 138 Bl katuka- ...- §63,178 karaha m ' frying pan ' || Ski kataha- §135,138 keara m. 'field, bed*||Skt. kedara- karchi /. 'ladle* || M. kadcf || Des, __ §60,101,138 kadacchu §187 Bl. kella m. 'banana* || M. kel, keje" karhna v. I 'to be boiled* || M. Skt. kadali §103 BL kadhne Skt. kvathate„„.§165 Bl. kessu m. 'kind of flower* || Skt. k&rha (WP) m. ' camel' || Skt. kaimsuka- §24,160 karabha- - §138 khabba adj. m. 'left, not-right' || karih /. 'bits of cowdung' || Skt. gktj kharva- §163 §145 ka rls a- z~f k&rni/.'masson's trowel* || Skt. khagga m. 'leaf of ghia kamar karanda- \ _.- §187, 189 Skfi khadga- §153 k&rfi m. 'medicine for horses* khai /. 'ditch'||M. id.\\Skt. khata- Skt. katuka- §138 §137,138* Bl. 117 khes /. 'a sheet of figured cloth' kliair m. ' kind of wooj U25 M. kher [| Skt. khadira- Pers. kes ^ — §101B1 khet m. field' M. set Skt. khaj /. 'itching' 11 M.[ MJlSkt. ksetra- §15,19 Bl. kharju §25 Bl. khicri /. 'mixtnre'HSkt. khicca khajja m.'food' M. kha jell Skt. §15-J khadya- §16L 2 ) Bl. khfnkhap f t brocade' || Pers. khajfir | c date' M. fd.llSkt. kamkhwab Li §125 khariura- §163 Bl. khir /. 'rice pudding' m. id. 1§167 Bl. khammha m. 'column, pole' M. Skt. ksira- kh§d II Skt. skambha- khirki (H) < window' M. _ 155, 166 Bl. khldkillDes khadakki Bl. kh&na v. t. 'to eat' HSkt.khadati §187 __ §137 khissa m. 'pocket' Pers. kisa- khand /. 'sugar' Skt. khanda- _ §125 §155 kMtti/. 'constellation' H M. katya khanda prep. part. 'eating'HSkt. Skt.krttika ... . khadant- §117 " §97,124, 152,170 ti BL khangh /. 'cough; |||M. ^hastfj khoh /. > klra m, 'insect' || M. kida||Skt. /. 'elb Skt klta- §137,138, Bl. i 8 138 kirtghdn [kirtkcAn] adj. kukkar m. 'cock' || Skt. kukkuta- 'ungrateful' ts. ||Skt. krtaghna- _ §64,137,152 ~J§90| kukkh /. 'womb' || M. kus ||Skt. kitta past. part, 'done' || M. kela kuks 15. 49.137.167 Bl Skt. kj-ta- _ §25, 97,170 ii Bl. adj, m, 'soft' [j M. komvla Skt kSmala- ...... §103 Bl k6h m. 'league, l£ miles' ||M. kos Skt. krdsa- I §145, 162 Bl. kulthi /. 'kind of pulse' || Skt. kulattha- §187 k6hni kuhni q, v. k6l(8) prep. I 'near' M. kor knmmS (WP.) m. 'tortoise'||Skt. 'side'? Ski kroda- kurma | „... §24,163 — §49,103,162 Bl. kunalf /. 'dish' ||WP. kunni kSrh m. 'leprosy' ||M. k5dh||Skt. kunda m* 'large cup' ||M. kumd I kustha- cf. Pa. kotha- Skt. kun ^4 ma^lan /. 'wife of a gardener' masSd m.'end of a month'||Skt. Skt. malin'i — §64 masanta- sts. §155 121 masanjm. 'burningjplace' Ml mitt m.tfriendilSkt.Imitra_-§19 mhasan ||ISkt.]smasaiia-|(]oan^m_ittha[a^'. m. 'sweet' ||M.mitha from |H.) 167 Bl. Skt. [mis ta- |§166 mass browing moustache' mltti 'earth' JM. mati. |j Skt|gmas$iu _ §28,162,167 ID o g. mitti (dental tt) || Skt. miissi /. 'mother'slsistei),y Imrttika __ §138,139, 170 ii Bl. Imavsilll Skt. matr^vasr- m6ea\past\pait. 'dead' || H.Jmua _ §165 Bl. Skt.Jmrta-T IT §98,170 ii matj(i) = marh (i) qv ts. mohla m. 'pestle' M. musal mater I , J'step-mother' Skt. # • Skt.imusala-^H — §76 Bl. Imatritara- —I §103. moprilm. 'leader'||Skf. mukhara- mattha m. 'forehead' I M. — §76 matha iliSktlmastaka- moMQadj. m. 'Icose'lJI J. Skt. §152,166 Bl mutkala- __§38 mattna m._ 'fritter' ||(Skt. mrsta- Jmotthajm. 'kind|ofIgrassJ' Skt. —J§96 musta — §38 matti /. 'big earthen[vessel'||Skt. motfi m. 'pearl' tf || Skt. mrttika? raarttika §97 ktika §153 BL maulnaR;*! 'toMbloom' HlSkt.HmunasI(WP.)ImJ'husband Skt. mukula- 36 manu§ya- ^^ §187 maus /. 'day on which sun andMmucch moustache' || Skt. moon are in conjunction' || M. | smasiu-Pkt. mamsu avaslli Skt. amavasya. ts. — §28,167 ^^|§5l,]40Bl. muddh m. 'beginningill Skt. mhais < buffalo' contam. of Imurdh [§24, 49,170 ii; •main and"bha.is J§179 m mo M. mukh |jSkt mfddha m. Y_'ram ' M. m§dha mukha- §115,138,1139 Bl ISktJmedhra §162 Bl. mukkanafc>;M'tol be shed mihj/. 'rain'||j Skt. megha- I G-.I mtikvulHIM.Imukne IllSkt 1 §78,115,138 mukta- *mukna- 154 {i) Bl. mijjh /. 'marrow' || Skt. majjS, / dof 'ass' |j Skt. Imedas-^^^^^B ] __ §26, 126Hmun«Ja §155 a mir°c /.I'chilli' IllM.tniri |||Skt. mMn na vt.l'to I Skt. marica-n# mancya mundayati §155 §26|64,p87 BL^mut Jm.|'urine'I|| M.|«d.J|| Skt. mi ss^i^adj.fm^ 'mixed' M. mutra- —1§15,139IB1. missi|/.|'tooth|powder ||JSkt. | mutthjfffat 1 ||JM. muthjn|Skt. mi s r a- §139,162 Bl. musti §15J]39,166B1. mitna[|f 'to|>e Obliterated' HSkt.^iabernafy*. 'toHfinish'Il trans. mr§ ta- §136 form n i bbarna^( nirvartate- 122 nirvrta-) §109 nar /. 'vein* |J M. nad ||Skt na 126 peM =^paha q. v. phind/. 'ball' || Skt. piEtda-? peO m. father' || WP. piu,||K. pi3 - §124 Skt.pitr- _ §60,101,103 ph6rna v. t. 'to break'|| Skt. phaggan m. *N*of a month' \\cf. 'sphstayate' _„ §108,166 M. phag * Holi song ' II Skt. phull m. 'flower' ||>M. phul|| Skt. phalguna- phulla- -.-. §137 Bl. v + §22, 64,137, 140,164 Bl. phiitfna v. «*. 'to ..burstMl-M. p^Sha m. * snare, noose' || M. phutn§ || Skt. sphutyatg phasa'dice' || Skt. p£sv _ §108,166 Bl. _ 124, 166 Bl. picch /. 'rice water' || M. pis||Skt. phal m. 'fruit' || M. phaj || Skt. piccha ,§152 Bl. phala- -.~ 49, 137,143 Bl. piecha m. 'the hind part'||Skt. ph&la m. ' ploughshare ' \\r M. pasca- __ §26,166 pfcaja || Skt. ph^la^... §137:.B1. plgh /. 'swing' || Skt. prankha phalfih m. 'kind of tree' = palah -..- §78,121 (3), 155 q. v. .*_.. §57, 125 pigla adj. m. 'lame' ||M. pSg(la) phambh /. 'fine wool' || s. pas Skt. pangu- __ § 26,155 Bl. Skt, paksavan—if not from Pers. pasm, pamba- §125 pfhna v.t. 'to grind' || ?. pexoiki phammhan m. 'eyelash' || also Skt. *pim?ati, || Pkt. pissi 'bhapphan || Skt. pak?man _ 110,1C0 \ - ?§rl25 pijj ]>n> 'pretext' || WP. pajj || Skt. paryaya- ...„. §26 phan m. 'snake's hood' || M. iphan || Skt. phana- ptla. adj. m. 'yellow' || M. pivja _ 137,140 Bl. I Skt. pitala- I phangh m. 'feather, wing' || M. .„ §63,103,143 Bl. plkh || Skt. paksa- pinda m. 'body'||M. Skt. pinda-l — §114,125 Bl. §155 a pharha m. ' blade, nib ' || M. pinj la adj. w?. = pigla q. v. a pharas || Skt. para§u- pinj na v. t. 'to card (cotton)' a L- § 124,^145 Bl. || also pinn na || Skt. pinjayati phatna v.i. 'to be split' || M. ~ §155 phatn§ || Skt. sphatyate plnfra w. 'cage' || M. pSjra ._ §107,161 Bl. Skt. pinjara- — §26,155 BL 127 pinn m. 'ball' H M. pinid Skt. p6nna m. ' sugarcane ' also pi^da- . „_. §15, 137,155 BL ponda Skt. pau?dra- pipla niul m. 'root of long pep _ $38,105,155 per' || M. piiupjiill Skt. pippali- potta m. 'grandson' Skt...... §152 Bl. pautra- _ §L5, 20,162 pippal m. 'the pipal tree' Skt. pdttlia m, 'book* || M. pothi || pippala- §1'2 Skt. pustaka-: *paustaka- cf. Pers. pust, || Pen. post §38 Bl. plr /. 'pain' || Skt. pida -pp(an) suffix for making §15,127,138 abstract nouns also pan (a) pirha m. 'footstool' |j M. pidhg g^t. -tva(na)- §i65 Skt. pitha- §15,138 Bl. puSdh m. 'eastern part of a pittana v. t. 'to beat (breasts)' country* IL Skt. purvardha- f'M.pit^ll Skt.pista-t ...^.. §170 in §136 Bl. pucah.ana v.t. 'to ask' || M. pusrte pitta, m. 'bodily constitution' •Skt. prcchati Skt. pitta- §152 _ §98, ,137,, 152 Bl. pitth/, 'the back'IIM. pith || puck/, 'tail' || WP. puceh ||Skt. Skt.; pr$tha- §97 BL puccha- [§25,152 pujbna v. t. 'to I wipe H. pltthi./. 'wet dal ground or pochna, puchna || M. pusne §166 bruised Ml Skt. pista? Skt. pronchati, || Pkt. pumchai P oh m . pau§a- * 137 bujja^a (WP.) v. i. 'to reach' pdhan w.'cart' ||Skt. pravahana- EP. pugg°ha H Skt. puryate(t) „.« §162 — §24,161 (?) pdhllo adj. 'fat (person)' || Skt. punn m. 'merit, charity' || Skt. pu?ya- tsj prthula- ...... §98,170 ii §161 (3) punna (WP.) past. part, 'arrived pdfckhar m. 'tank, lake M Skt purna- §24 pokhar Skt. pauskara §105,166 Bl punneci /. 'full moon day* Skt. purijuma .- §24,163 p5l m. 'hollowness' || M. pol I pur m. 'single stone of; a mill' Skt. pulya- *paulya- \ | fM. puda || Skt. puta- \ -... 38, 129 Bl. 1 — §15, 138 Bl. 128 pur ana adj. m. 'old* Poa ratt m. 'blood' II M, rata 'red* par£na || Skt. purana- Skt. rakta- _ §153 BL I §59,186 ratti m. 'short form of personal putla m t doll iM.Iid. || Skt. name Ratan' |] Skt. ratna-, puttala- §65, 121 (5) Bl raktika -_ §154 (3) putt y/t.-'son' || WP. putta M. rauh m,|'juice' || also raih, ras put Skt.putra- Skt^^. rasa| - _ §72, 74 7,15, 19 49, 137,162,170 raula m. 'noise' II Mul. rdla IISkt. (IV) Bl. rava+'la- — §105 puttha adj. m. 'turned upside ricch m. 'bear' || M. ris Skt down' || Skt. pr^tha-.— §97, 98 rksa- §99,167 Bl rai /. 'mustard' II M. id. || Skt. rijjhana v.i. 'to be boiled' || rajika U §138 B1.J Skt. rdhyate- — §99,161 (2) raihat m. - halht q. v. ._ §187 rln /. 'grains of sugar, sand, etc.' raj m» 'kingdom' || Skt. rtjya- ren recorded by Maya Singh §161 Skt. renu- _ §39 1, rammh°na v.L 'to begin' rindl /. 'castor' || Skt. granda- Skt. rabhate §155 _ §26,' 155 2. rammh°na v.i. 'lowing of rinnh°na v. t. 'to boil, cook' || cows' Skt. rambhate §155 Skt. *rindhati- *_§155 ram aram a. v. rlttha m. ' Soap-nut' || WP. randi /. 'widow' M. rid |f Skt. harittha || M. ritha* || Skt. randa ^§155 Bl. arista- _ §25, 51,132,166. Bl. rang m. 'colour' If M. ramg r(5k adj. 'cash' || Skt. raukma- Skt. ranga- | §155 Bl. -.- §154 (1) r£m /. 'queen' M. bani Skt rona v. i. 'to weep* || Skt. rodati r^jhi §154 (2) Bl ] ..... §103,170 (t) rann f. 'wife' randi 'widow' rn m. 'soft hair on the body' Skt. randa- • • §143,155 Skt. rdman- « §103, 119 rassi /. 'rope' || M. id. Skt ruah m. ' large beans ' || Skt. rasmi- §143,167 Bl ^^^rajamasa^- _ §138 rat /. 'night' || M. id. Skt. r£tri- riicna v. I 'to be pleasing' ||Skt. §143 Bl. rucyati „ §161 129 rui /. 'cotton' || Skt. r6man- saha m. 'hare' | also saiha, seha • *< $140 M. sasa || Skt. sasa- _ $75 Bl. rukkha adj. m. 'dry, without sahlag m. 'fook' || cf. M. sail grease' ||M. rukha ||Skt. ruksa- Skt. salyaka- ...... 128,187 Bl. 11 1 I III — $24iBL sai asill {/. v. raniuYna v. t. 'to engage' ISkt. sai m. 'master, saint' ISkt. * rundhati — $155 ^^^^svamm- ^ ^L- j$140 lUppa m. 'silver' || M. rupe saihna v.i. 'to bear, suffer' ||. M. Skt. rupya $161 Bl sah^g || Skt. sahate ..... $147 BL russana v. u 'to be angry' || M, sam hint' M. sftj6.ll Skt. rusn§ || Slit, rusyate samjM- L $154 (2) BL .... §15,143,161 (8) Bl. sainti adj.' thirty-seven ' || Skt sabat /. 'courtyard' || Ar. sabat- 'jj — §57 saptatrimsat- $30 sftjh m. 'share' s s izhu Skt. saber m. f. ' morning' | I Skt. samsa $160 *savela- 143 (V) sacc m. 'truth' || Amb. sane || H. sajja adj. m. 'right, notj left' sftcli M. sac, samca ||Skt. satya- Skt. sajja- $152 ... $113,161 (2) Bl. sakna v. i. 'to bef able ' || M. si.d /. ' welfare ' used in the sakne Skt. saknote, sakyate- phrase sukkh s3d || bkt. santi- ^^ $154 (1), 161 BL ; ...... $155 sakarna v. t. 'to honour a hundi' sadda m. 'invitation' || M. sad M. sakar ' honour * |||Skt. Skt. sabda- ! .„..< $19, 153 Bl. satkarayati _ BL sakk m. 'bark'||WP. srakk-|| stddhe alj. increased by half || M. sadhe ||Skt. sardha- Skt. salka-: *sarka- $164 sakkar /. 'sugar, not refined* I .... $144 Bl. sadhur m. 'red vermillion' || M. M. sak(h)ar ||Skt. sarkara semdur || Skt. sindiira- |$163 Bl. $126 Bl. Saldm. 'wife's brother' ||M.«d. Skt. syala- .... $ 161 (8) BL sSg /. 'point' M.saku Skt. Salhabbi 'dampness' || Pers. sankti- $25 Bl. sailabi Hl28 sah m. 'breath' || Skt. svasa- sail m. 'dart'H'M. sal11Skt.galya- $145, 165 \ -.-. $ 129 Bl 130 saluna adj. m.I'salted' Skt. sarhs /. J'rape J seed' |||Skt.jsar- saiavana- I s?apa - I§Il63,174 samhalna vt. 'to protect' Skt. sarikkha Iadj.1 'similar' also sambhalayati 196 a s rkha || M^^^sarkli^ a Pkt* samjh na*v.t. 'to understand' M. .sarikha-t J §189 Bl. samajne || Skt. sambudhyate sarkha=sarikkhalt. —K> • 144,155 sartha-. — § 17o iii Bl. sahgal=stingall(/.v, sangh[w. 'thi*oat'||Sxt[sankha- ? satt adj. 'seven' || M. sat || Swt 'saptan- ^ ^155 \ ' "_; § 19, 49,144, 153 Bl. sangticana o.t. 'to shrink Skt saipkucyae ] satth adj. 'sixty' y M.JsathUSkt s^nj h fi 'evening' M.|sSjh I ? a§ ti- _.... §tl44 Bl. Skt. sandbya-1 satthal m. 'thigh' Skt. sakthiu- I • |.r.J§87,155,16,1(2) Bl. [„ § 64,153 saVnibi m. 'share-holder'jli Skt. satt In m 'companion Skt. sam§a- ZM >> 160 sarthika- § 170 iii sautali adj. 'forty-seven' Skt sattu m» 'meal of parched grain' I saptacalvarimsat- 11... 130 ; sapp m. 'serpent1 HJAnib. samp M. satu |HSkt. saktu- M.Jsap l||Skt saipa-JI •• ]_.._ § 103, 153 Bl. § 15, 10 BLHsauIadi.Ihundred'lllJSkt.sata- sar&pjsarauhna=srap,[ s raulma I IBTJ — $ ft38 , .144 q.v. 1 1 • H pauh /. 'oath' || Skt. sapatha- sarl&hl hnM ' headache ^^ J§ 116.138,144 Fani.Isiil+Mll Skt vyadhk- §1611(7) saubra m. 'father-in-law' || Ms ba£hi /• 'scarf M.fcadi Skt sasra || Skt. svasura- ffati-ll • „.M261B1. § 1(43, 145, 1651B1. J 181 saula adj. m. 'black' || M. savja. 1»,; si,past tense 'was, ,were Skt. syava-?. Syatnala- Lah. ha etc. II Skt. asit ?- § 101,161 Bl. — 4145 saun m. 'N. of a mouth* || Skt. 2. si /. 'furrow, ploughing' ^^^sr avan 1a ...... § 101,142,162 Skt. ssita- ua3 sauuda prep. past, 'sleeping* si /. 'boundary' HJSkt. sfman- Skt. svapatt- 1103,119 siddha adj. m. 'straight, honest' sa ut (H). /. 'co wire 'I M. savat Skt.csiddha- -, _ ,§ L52 Skt. sapatni sidhra adj. m. 'simple* used in _ §154 (3),187B1. ,> phrase 'Sidhra pudhra Skt. siva. adj. '(one) and a quartet) M.id. || S'tt. sapada- sidhra- ^^-* 162 sijjhana v. t. 'to have a settle _. § 138 Bl. ment' ||M. sijfle ||:Skt./ sidhyati se&l m. 'winter* || Skt. sitakaJa- _ § 161 (2) Bl. j §r60,101,103,138, 143,186 sikkh/.'advice'|| Skt.»siksa s§dh m. 'personal name' || also §15,167 seddhu cf. se*th || Skt. SreStha- sib d/dj. 'cool'*insil subhau ||fM. -.- § 126 stla 'cold' 11Skt. sitala- .... § 103 se"ha=&aba q.v. § 145 also sillha 'damp' „.„ § 128 BL sghraj m. jfchaplet' || M. sera sing m. 'horn' || M. ft/.f$*mg||Skt. Skt sekhara- I „„. § 138.B1. srnga* §97,155,BL s§j=eh£j q.v. i sragh m. used | in personal s§lkhari /.'soap stone' Skt names Sift. S'mha-£s_§ 175 Saila+ f — § 128. sinjana v.t. 'to water' || M. sella m. 'spear' || Skt. Salya (?,) simcn&H Skt. sincati - §29 J J § 19,155 Bl. sem /; 'flat bean* || Skt. simba: sirhl (H) * • 'ladder' HSkt. Saimbya, also simba- § 34,155 s redhi J — § 78 1. sSth m. 'banker* ]| cf. ssdhj sittana vJ. ^o throw' || WP. M. set || Skt.^re?thin- satt-,[sutt-||M. $it||Skt. W^fsfr- §166B1. or si§ta- I ....- •§ 97,136 2. seth m. 'expressed sugar- siuna m. 'gold' also seOna cane' || M. Sit || Skt. Sista- M. sone Skt.suvarna-, svaina- § 34 Bl, sivaina- § 37,163 BL 132 s6hna adj. m. 'beautiful* ISkt. saJanvuHSkt. sulagna* § 187 Sobhana- §138 sunana v.t. to hear Skt, s61a adj. 'sixteen' || M. s5ja||Skt. ^r?6ti _ § 98,140 96da£an- § 144 Bl. sundh /. 'dry ginger' || M. ifith srauhna v.t. 'to praise Skt. Skt. sunthi- PL55 Bl. slaghats- § 138,172 sune£r m. 'goldsmith'i]l Skt. srakk (WP.) m. 'bark VEP. sakk suvamakara- 1*101 q.v. stingal m. 'chain' || M. s£.ka} srap m. 'curse' || Skt. sipa-fs. Skt. Synkhala- ^^ ^^ 1 § 96, 98,136 Bl. sQba r m. 'raonday' [Skt. sungarna vi. 'to contract' || Skt. somvara- §103 * samkutati- §109 subb m.'swab to clear utensiis' sungh°na v.t. 'to smell' || M. M. suijibl! Skt. sulba- § 164 Bl. sumgnS || Skt.* sytftkhati- suh /. 'news' Skt. # Sodhi-c/. — § 33, 98, 115 Bl. bOdhi- —_J §78. sfinhapp (WP.)=suhappa9 q.v. M&'adj. m. 'red' || Skt. sobha- -.- k 165 - §78 sunna adj. m. 'empty' WP. suh£g m. 'union with a husband' sunja |l|M. suna || Skt. Sunya- Skt. saubhagya- — § 161 § 24, 161 (4) Bl. suhappan (WP.) m. 'beauty' siir m. 'hog' || Skt. sukara- Skt.* subhatvana (?) „_ § 165 | _ § 103,138 suhaunav.*. 'to bepleasant*||Skt. siir&g /.'underground passage sukhapayati §138 M. suramgjll Skt. surunga stihni/.'broom' || Skt. sSdhani- ^^ § 64,112,187 Bl 1§88 sfttna v.t. J'tojdraw asjwire'f suljf, 'needle' ||M. suiHSkt. sue! Skt. stitravati- k no I § 15, 138 Bl. sut ,ra. 'thread' || M. id. |[ Skt siijjhana v.t. 'to occur to mind' sutra- f : §7,19,162 Bl Skt. sudhyate _ § 161 (2) sutta past part, 'slept, asleep 1 sukka adj. m. 'dry' sukkha, m. | Skt. supta- | t a particular plant' || M. ^^ ^J § 19, 97,144, 153 suk(h)a || Skt. *d?ka- § 166 Bl tacch°na v.t. 'to hew' || M. sulagna v.t. 'to be kindled' || G-. taste H Skt. taksati ...... 167 Bl. 133 a u\dd aslv.t 'to ope a wide' ||Skt. tapparjw.j'matjjl WP.|trappai* atrdati — §U7lM Sktltaba- :*Itarna- i£hnavtf. 'to[drive away' WP |§ 163, 164 trahnji M. Mtaras skt.; tarnafc;.i. I'to cross'III M. tavre" trasayati § 162]B1. Skt. tarati- ^l08lBl. taialwl'copper coin'||Skt. ta nkaH tdrakhI (wp)l^. J^hyena' Ml §137 ta ras Skt.Itaraksa- takhSn m 'carpenter' Skt. § 187IBL lt£ksan- J§ 57,167 tatlhra, m 'sandpiper' |Skt. ttikk^nalvi. 'to estimate' || Skt. tfttibha- f § 137 tarkayati- § 137jl63H^ta adj.\m. 'hot']!! Skt.Jtapta- takkalaB m 'spindle'll TRTP. • J I__ §137,97, 153 trakkai,laIiSkt.Itarku- tatti /. 'screen' || WP. tratti ||M. § 64, 163*^(tat, origin not known. takkari balance WP mB1 trakkf^i]|||Skt.[tarka-( ?) J M I III 111"- * - tt(aii) suff. nsed in forming ^^ § 163, abstract nonns = pp(anj q.v. lalna. v.i. 'to go away' || ^. .''.I §165 talnS HSktJtvalati- __§ 137 Bl. O • 1 tan m. 'heat'HWE. taj|Skt. tapaj tSmba m. 'copper || M. tabg || ^^^ § 103, 137 W>. trama || Skt. tarara- t?ddha adj. m. 'crooked, slanting' ^ 162,17a WP. tredha, || H.jterha. J origin t&i"*% v.t, 'to stretch' || M r notlcertain Si7i taqn || Skt, tanayati- ' * " «. § 140 Bl. tehlteala^iJw. 'thirsty'JiffSkt. : tand m. J /.| 'gur, | threadjj M. tr?ayita- §|60 taipt Skt. tdntu- tdm. 'oiT H Skt.|taild-:[#tailya- §|137, 155 Bl. • Hi -1*129 tang/. 'leg'||Skt. tanka „.- § 1371 ]thabba[m.|'bnndle' || jijthava tSpnalv.i.[ 'to}be heated[ || Skt. HSkt. stabaka- | _..-J %17 7 Bl. tapyatP §[107,161 thahl m .\f J*bottom,ldepth [ M tapp°na Jv .uj' toj jnm p Poth. tha||Skt. sthagha-?I_™§|l66]Bl tfapp na Skt. •tarpatiiHthftlii/I'plate'llI M. thaja Skt trpyati ] ...J $163 sthall- J3§lL66Blf 134 thammh m. ^'column^ ' Skt. tfkkha adj. m. 'sharp' || WP. L'. stambha- . § 155, 166 trikkhaj|\I. tikha||Skt. tiksna- t % than m. 'teat, uddei.i M. thana ...... § 23,167 Bl. Skt. stana- § 166 Bl. til m. 'sesame seed' || Skt. tila- thani adv. 'through'||Skt slh^na- r-A 137 § 166 tin m. 'blade of grass' [| M. taij thandha adj. m. 'cold' M. Skt. tyna § 13731. thamda.ll Skt. stabdha- tinn adj. 'three' || M. tin || Skfc 171 Bl trim- 4 7,162 Bl. thathgra m.'brazier'|| Skt, tva?t|-- tinnh*na v.t 'to prick'||Skt. §171 *trndhati cf. Vtrh, IrnSdhu- . thafl /. 'place, .rooqa' II WJP, th I »_ ^ 167 Skt. sthftman- tircha adj. m. 'slanting' || M. _ § 103, 112, 119, 140 |tirka||| Skt. tirasca- i:: thaukar m. 'lord' || H. thakur ^^ J 65,166, 181,187 Bl. Skt. thakkura- §137 tittar m. 'partridge' || M. titar theli/.'palm'| Skt. hastatala- Skt. tittira- __ § 64,152 Bl. _.._ § 103 tch m, 'husk' || Skt. ttisa- thSra m. 'aged person'] U...... § 76,145 ther||Skt. stbavira- -._ § lOlJBl. t6lna I v.t. 'to weigh''|| Skt.' th6hllu m. t fat man also tolayati __ § 108 thulla || Mul. thQhl || M. thuli, t6rna v.t 'to break' || Skt. thuli, thSr||Skt. sthula, sthaulya- trStayati JI .._ § 108/162,171 -L § 38 Bl. trai (WP). adj. 'three' Skt. th6ra adj. m. 'little* || M. thoda trayah - §105 Skt. stoka- § 166 Bl. < dew EP. tel tia adj. m. 'third' || also tijja trgj (WP).| Skt. tftiya- — §97,142, 170 ii origin not knownj _ § 176 1. tih / 'thirst' || cf. M. tahan, tuhla m. 'buoy with lamps'||Skt. tanh (tj-siia) || Skt. tr?a- tula- (?) — 128 77, 97, 145 Bl. tulfti /. 'quilt'||Skt. tula ._ § 59 2^ tih adj. 'thirty' || M. tfsl tummana v.t. 'to clean cotton, Skt. trimsat- _ § 135, 160 Bl wool'J|| Skt. trumpati tljja=tia q. v. I § 155,156 135 tunnana . v. t., 'to stow' Skt. uggarna v.t. 'to wield* |||Skt turna- * ' J §24 udffurati I ....„I § 64 turna v.i. 'to walk' || Skt. turati uggha adj. m. 'famous1 II Skt. §137 udgha- ? ... § 153 tusi pron. I 'you' a'so tusS uggharna v.i. 'to become cleai« > Skt.* tufime cf. asme Skt. udgha tate ^ 153 ._ § 50,167 ukkarna v.t. 'to engrave, || Skt. tuss a~;na; v.i. 'to appear .i (of utkirati § 64,109, 153 small-pox)' || Skt. tu§yati ukkhal m. 'mortar* || M. ukhal l§ 16L;..(8) Skt. ultikhala-, *utkhala- tutrna. v.i. 'to break' || M. • • • ...... § 153 Bl. tutn§ II Skt. trutyati ukkharna v.i. 'to come off'||Skt. 4 108,161,171 Bl *utkhatati, *utkhitati iitthan v.i. t be kind Skt. r m m 1 _ §109,153 I -.- § 171 tu§ ta- ul Smbha m. 'complaint' ubbha (WP.)a^".'erect, upward' ulammha |j Skt. upalambha- ? • II *M. nbha, udhavllSkt. urdhva- ...... § 155 _ § 24,165 Bl. ullarna v.i. 'to lean out', origin bbhar swell' not known, §109 Skt. udbharati ...... § 109,153. i ticcarna|vX 'to speak* 11 Skt. una. adj. m. 'defficient I M. uccarati I §152 u^a || Skt. una-__ § 15,140 Bl uccarna v.i. 'to be separated as unca adj. m. 'high* || WP. ucca skin J from(flesh' || M. ucatr§ M. uijica. || Skt. ucca- Skt. uccatati 6 152 Bl. ] § 25,113.152 Bl. ucerna trans. 'points I to' ungal /. 'finger' || Skt. anguli- Vucest- „.„ § 28, 64, 155 udna v.i. to fly=urna q.v. ungarna v.i. 'to sprout* Skt. uddharua v.i. 'to be unstitched' a nkura- I §28 Skt. ? §109 ungh°na V.I: to nod' || Skt. ugali m. 'witness*||Pers. gawah- unkhati ...... § 155 § 135 unhala (WP.)=hunala q. v\ ugga n a v.i, 'to grow' || also unjal m. 'double handful* M ug(g)amna Skt. udgata-, c >ipjal Skt. anjali-, udanjali- udgamyate § 153,161 (5) ...... § 28 Bl 136 iinn /. 'wool' || Skt. urna 9th m. 'earner || WP. ut$h ||*Skt. $24, 163 u§tra- __ § 25, 166 upaj na v.i. 'to grow IM. uttarna v.i. *to come down* || M. upajne || Skt. utpadyati uttarne || Skt. uttarati § 153,161 (2) Bl. " _ § 109,1525B1. \ tippar prep. adv. 'upon* || M. vassana(WP.)v.i. 'to rain* || Skt* var||Skt. upari _ § 49,177 Bl. varsati ...... § 163 upparna (WP.)apparna q. v. vilamna (WP.) 'to stop > Skt. § 36,153 vilambate §187 upphanana v.i. 'to swell* || M vfrto (S.) 'tired* ll'Skt. Virikfe- uphann§ || Skt.* utphanati . — §.153 Bl. nrna v.i. 'to"fly* jj M. udn§||Skt. vircanu (S)|v.t. 'to be tired* uddayate § 152 Bl. Skt. viricyate ussarna v.i. 'to be built' II Skt. ya. conj. 'or* also Iq.v.l utsarati _ §109,167 Pers." ya — §141 Utah adv 'upwards* || M. fit yar m. /. 'friend* || also jar q.v. Sktud+t § 54 Bl. Pers. yar- ^ § 141 fNDEXOF SANSKRIT WORDS. amsa- hass, liassl, h&sl'f.|J apupa- 1 ptifa (?) akSa+pata (a)Khara. apsaras-, apsara acch'rS. V V amavasya- 'inaus. aksara- akkhar. aksi- akkh. amyta- •ami. • rf"x rf^vi /^*% arnba-, ambt ammS. agni%mm%w - agg. ambara- amar, ambar. agnistha- > gitthi. 1_ 0 n. — ^^^^ amra-=amra- amb. agra- agga. •ft aralika imli¥. imbli. *agrake agge. * ^ —. - * • aranya- arna. anka- * a ng. arista- (unhurt) rittha.B^HMJ ankUra- &gur. arka- (sun) akk. ankusa- ahgas ts. argha- Mul. aggh. angara- SLgear. a ardha- addh[a]. anguli- ungal, ung li. -trtiya- dliai. aiigu§tha- guttha. -pancama- dhaunca mm M1" aja+paun- WP. ayaji. 4H (loan from H.) ajanat- WP. ayafla. -ptira- adhura. anjana- an Jan. -mana- dhaun. anjali- unjal. arma- (snsrat ra-) ambcna. atta- atari, atali. • • alakta- alta. adya- ajj. alagna- . alagg. adhuna- lain. avasya- 5s. antara- andai (Persiant) avela- * aber. andha. annha. | asiti- aasi. *andhakara- nhe"r[a] asru- Ainjh(fi). anna- aim. 1 asvina- assu. J ann&dya- anaj. astau- atth. anyakara- neara. asta- athna, atthamha. apatya- 'bacc. -m ayana- atthan. apara- nOr. asthi- hadd (?) aputra- aut. j asme- as!, asS. 188 ft akhyati akhna, akkh na. udgamyate uggamnaj 1 • akhy&na^ WP. akha[u]n. udgha- uggha 'famous*, ajna an. udghatate ugghayna. anda- anda. udgurati uggarna. ] atman- ap, apna. udbharati ubbharna. anayati WP. an°na. udvartana- batna, H ubtan. antra- fid. upari- uppar. araan- Su, WP a. upaskara-1 bakkhar. IHl amalaka- aula.i^9HH upalambha- f^Bulambha. ainra-|(=amra-) amb. uluka- 1 u) lu. • ¥ I ardra-1 adda.HHH ultikhala- ukkhal. *ardla- alia. ustra- nth, utth. ardhika- addhi. ; ;' usnakala- Imnala. alasya- alas. n?ma- hussar, hutt, asa- as (loan from H.) hummh. afivina- assu(?)H. asauj. uhya (Pkt. vojjha-) vujjha-bSjh. a§adha- harh, una. | aha- * V ah WP. ahna, una-1 • ik§u- ikkh. urdhva- ubbha. ricch. indhana- innhan. ydhyati # rijjhana. i§ta.!istaka itt. eka- ifckj lsvara-M issar. ekastha- kattha. i?a- WP. hlh. ekakin- u nklia ti u nghana. kallajSB ekadasa ucca- unca, ucca. gyara,, gears. aikya- §kka. nnchati hGjhna. odra- od. uddayats udna, urna. ostha- H. h§t. utki rati ukkarna. austra- WP. ottha. uttarati uttarna. kamsa WP. kaiha *utthati (Pkt. utthai)f ; Q I MuttVna. I kaksa- kakkh. | kacch. utpadyate kaksa- upajna.M kankana- kangan. utphanati upphan°na kankata- ka ngha. utsarati ussarna. kacchapa- kacchu. • udgata- J uggana. kajjala- 13" 139 kancu- (kanj, kunj. plough.1 kal a1-I jkal.I1 T WW kalapa- kalava. kataka- kaya. a • kalpayati WP. kapp na. kataha- kayah [a]. • kalya- kallh. 0 * katuka- kanya. • kamsya- . • kSssi. kanda. kantaka- • • • kaka- k&u. kantha- kandha. • • • kaca- [*kacca-] kanc kati- kai. WP. kacc. kathayati kaihna. kana- kana. • kantha kandh. kanda- kanna. • • kadali kglla. katara- kair. kanduka- khuddo. -kara- stiff.—ar. kannya* EP. kannea, WP. karttika- katta,-6 kattak. ^^^ kanj. karmana- kaman. • kaparda- kauddi. kaj. • • karya- kaphala- kahla. kala- kal. kaphoni - kuhni. kala- kala. kamala- kaul. kasa- kahi. kamm"na. | kath. kampats kastha- • -kara- suff.—sr[a]. ] kasa [*kassaPkt. karafika- kar&g. -kainsa]. V khangh. karati karna. kahla. karabha- WP. karha. kahala- kirana- ki ran. karih. • karlSa**C* *• ** • *"' - (B ** B "* *• ^V kita- kira• S * ^" ^»^r .• karkatifca- kakkari. • • kill a. kakkar. kila- karkara4bV %^w ^™ ^^^^^i^^P ^™ ^^^F- m "• kukkuta- kukkar• . kann. • Kama• - kuks i- kukkh. kartati katfna. katt°na. ktinkuma- kungu. karpata kapp*ra. knneika- kunji. kutumba- kuram. khappar. • karpara- • 5 kapah. kuttayati kutfna. karpasa-. • • kuntha- khundha. kabra. • • karbara- • • karma- kanwn. kunda- kunda, kiinali. kars ati kasna. kuddala- kudal. 1M khass°na.BBHH kuputra- •H } kaputta. / 140, kustrl-B 1 khuttlii. krOdal kOl. | 1 kvathate karhna. kubra- kubba. # cf. kubhra kvatlia- karha. kumara-B kaur, Jkamara k§ara- khar, char, k§ ira- khir. kumbhakara- H kamhear. k§ udi'a- ksudla) kula- J kul* • Ml khulla. kulatth a; kulthi. ksudha khoh. kulyS- kuJiU4 k§ura- chura. ku? tha- lgi|th (plant), ksurapra- khurpa. ku? tha- kftrh, I • I ks Stra- khgt. * khuss8na. kus^ati khatva khatt. kuta- WP. kur. khadga- khagga. ktipa- kbuh, kua. khagda-1 khaiina. kurca* kucc, khand. kurdati kudd°n a. khadira- khair. kurma- WP. kurama. kharju khaj. k ta kitta. r ; khujli. kyttika- khittl. kharjura- khajur. kgkara- kaira. kharva- khabba. ketaka- kefira. kjialla- khalU kedara- keara. kesarin- kshar khata- khal. kghri kji&dati khana. kshra. kjiadya- l^hajja. kaiipsuka- kessu. khaii- B tikhacj- kQti- kOrl, kr<5r. khinga- (Hemacandra). komala- kfiia. khinga. k5ra- k6r. kjhicca khieri. ko?tha- kottha. HHnl ga$da- ganda, • • *ko?ma- kussa. Bl gannu kauk?a- k5kh (WP.) garidaka- gaida. kautumba- k5raia. .j gannajg&deri o kridati lahehlna. gandupada- o ad5a. krunca- kunj. *gandhilla- o adhla. kr6$a-I ksh. H ga mayati ogamauna , 14* garga ra- gaggar graha- gaha, geha. gargari I graha^a- graihn ts. ' garjati gajj'na. gi £ma- giSu, grfi. ' • M garjara- gaojar. grasa- grab, gis. gardabha- gadha. ghata- ghara garbha- gabbha. +manca- gharaunja. gala- gal r gall, gha tayati gharna. gadha- garha. ghati- ghari. gSyati gatma. ghattayati ghattana. gali- gal. ghanta- ghand [I], guggulu- guggal. •ghara- ghar. guccha- guccba. ghar^a- guassa. guda+randhra- gohran. ghata- ghau. gumpha- gummha. ghatilla- ghail. gurjara- gujfr. ghasa- ghau, gba[h]. gulgulu- guggal gbn^a- ghun. gulma- gumma, ghr^a ghii; guhya- gujjha. gl rta- gheo, gudha- gttrba. -f pti ra- ghe£r. gurda- gtidda. ghotaka- ghSjra. gpy&ti gmana. grdhyati I cakra- cakk *.[!]. #J3fi°na. cakravakar cakva. gfdhra- giddb, canga- canga. *gr?ma- guminh. eancu- cunj. gyha- sete*ghara-. cataka- cira. g6- catati carhna. gStra- got.- catur- can-, cu-, ca-, g5dh&- g5h. caturtha- cauttha. gopala- gualla. caturthi* cauth. gOpura- goeriu caturdasa- cauda. I 31 gaura- gom.- a caturvimsati- caubl. grathn&ti gatth na. catuska- cS.uk. a gran th ati gaiidh na. catu§pancasat- curauia. granthi- gatth, gandh catuspada- cupaea granthila- g&dhla. catustrimsat- caunti. 142 cat vara Ij- car. cha-ndah- chann. catvariipsat calt. chala- chal, chalna. candana- cannan. ch a vi- chail. candra cand, can-, chadana- ebauni, chauna. camatkara- camkar. chaya- cha-u. oaiir[i]. chikka chikk. camara- tf campaka- camba+kalika- chidyate" chijj na. cameli. chidra- chidda. chutyate chuttana. carman- camm. chedana- chaini. +kara- camear. chstayati H. WP. carvayati cabb'na. a chsrna. *calyati call na. -r calani chaini. jangha jangh. citta- citt. jana- jana. citra- citta, citta. janayati jari°na . citrayati citt"na. janma- jamm. cira- "err. jauya- jann. cirbhata- cibbhar 3 ambu- 3*ammQ. cira- cira. jamtman. • cukra- cukka. Jala- jallwater*. ctmtati cnndana. j agrat- jagna. O • culla- cullha. adya- jadda. cu?ati ciisna.? cungh°na. 3 a taw jaea. cuina- cunna. jan&ti 3an*na. clida- cura. j&natr- jamal. caitra- I cet. ? ara- jar. c5k?a- cokkha. J ihvS jibli. c5ra- C5T. • » 3iva- Ji. eyuta- cuna. J lvan a- 3mn. chagala chglla. juSta- juttha. *chatati charna. jhuth. *cliattati chatfnav jy^?tha- j?ttha. chantati chandana. c/,.PI.G. jyaiStha- jeth.< chit jvalati jalna. chatti- chatt. tanka- taka. 143 tanka tang. triinsat- tih. • tatihra. trfgi- tinn. tittibha- • • • • • tvalate talna. trutyati tntt°na. • damarti dauru. trumpati tummana. • trotayati" . torna. dakni dain. • • tva? tp- thathera. dhSna. • • dhaukate • • takSati tacch°na. danistra datha q.v. takhan. daksina- dakkhan. tak? an-. a tantu- tand. 1 dagdha- daddh na. danda- danda. tatta. • • tapta-. • • tarak§a- tarakh. dadru- dadd. tarati tarna. dadhi- dahf. takkana. 1 +bhanda- dahindi. tarkayati 1 • • • • tarku- takk'la. danta- dand. tadd°na. dardura- daddu. tardati • • • • • • *tarpati tappansU darbha- dabbh. talpa- tappar. 1 darsayati dass°na a tanayati tan na. j daSa- ten. tamra- tamba. datha- jarh, darhi. tittar. d&tra- dattL tittira-. • ti ra sea- tircha. damanl- daun. til a- til. daya- daj. tikkha. dardhya- daddha. tiksna- • • • turna. divasa- dehara. turati • *tiila (tula) tulha. dipa- diva. tti?a- toh. dugdha- duddh. • tutthfflna. durlabha- dulla. tusta- • • • *tu?mg tusl. dura- dtir. a tusyati tuss na. dtirva dubb. a a turija tunn na. j dysyate diss na. tulai. 1 dr?ta- • dittha. tula- • • • • tr'i>a- I till. devara- de5r. trttya- . tijja, tia. I dauMtra- dohta. *0 tgh, till. dyuta- jua. tr§a <4 ^ w damm. trasayati if tahna. dramnia- 144 draks-i dakh. nimantra- neoda. draghate dahna. nimna+apa-f- dhyana? nimmsjhana. dvaUriin$at- battf. nimba- nimm. dv&daSa- barf. nirik?a- nirakh. dvara- bar. nirbhagya- nabh&g. dvitiya- dujja. nirmala- nimmal. dv&u- d5. nirvartats nibbarna. dhamani- dhaun. nirvahati nibhna. dharitri dhar°t. nigcala- nicla. dhavala- dhaula. nigcStati nacorna.' dhanya- dhan. nissanka- nasang. dh&ra dhar. niskalyate nikkalna. dhIvara jhiur. nisputra- naputta. dii tima dhua\ nistarati nittarna. . dhuli-, *dlmdi- dhur. nissarati nissarna. dhvaja jhanda. nfroga- narSa. dhvani- jhankar. nfla- lalan. nakula- nan]. rftyati naccBna. nakha- nauh. pakva- pakka. nagna- n a nga. pak?a- pakkh, phangh. nadf na-l. paksin- panchi. nanandj*- nan&d. paksman- phamman, nanandj** nanan. phambh. nayati nSna [k] pa ngu- plgla. pacyate Ti ava n&u, 9. pacna.. pancan- panj. il aiy a ti nass'na. B paneama- panjam nasta- natth na 5 pancaviipSati- nas-F-ka- nakk. paccf. pancaSat pSJSb. nasta- natth. panjara- nadi nar. pin j"ra. patta- na pi ta nal. patti. pathati parhiia. li t ma- nafi. pattra- patta. nikata- nera. patha-1 paha. nidra- nid. pathin- (panthan)pandh. 145| |*padira- n|•pair . ^^^H H pippal a- B W pippal. Kf&H | padma- pabb. pippali- piplamul. padmin? pabbati. p'sta- pitthi,p:tt°na. [para §6- 1 pharha. pltba- plrba. parasvah parsS. plda pir. parivesayati parSsna. pitala- pila. pariks a 1 parakh. puccba» pficb. parria- 1 patina. puta- pur. pardati padd"na. punya- punn. paryaya-? 1 pajj,pijj. puttala- putla. paryasta- 1 paPtna. putra- putt. paryasti- paltbi. purana- purana. parSu- passali. puskara- pokkbar. palasi- 1 palah. pustaka- pfittha. par(l)yanka- pabl§,g. purija- punna. par(l)yana- palana. purnuna punned. pallava- 1 pa'lla. puryate pujjana. pasca- 1 piccba. purvardba- puadh. pasrardha- pacadh. pulya- p5l. pasc'ma- 1 paccbS. pycchati pnccbana. patayati 1 pauna. pfthula- pohlls. pada- pamS. pr? tba- pitth, puttba.. padanta- paid. paundra- pSnna. paduka 1 pau§. pautra- pStta. pa dona- pa tin. pau?a- p5h. pan iya- pani. panskara- see p^skaua. paman- 1 pafi. | paustaka- see pnstaka. pariva- passa. prakhyana- pakharia. pSSa- pbaha. pratbama- paihlla. p:mSati 1 plbria. .'! prativasin- paraus(s^I. p;ccha pitch. prapautra- parotta. p;njayati pinjana. prabhi- paih, paub. pinda- I pinn, p'nida. 1 pralambate palamna. pit'r'- pe5. pravahana- poban. pitta-I H • pitta. B^gljJ' prastara- patthar. 146 prasvidyate^ pijjana, bharati bharna. prasvgda- parses. bhasman- bhass. prahara-; paihr. bhaga bhau. a prapayati pauna. bhagineya- bhan ja. s bhaniagara- bhSdear. *> priyakara- peara. • prenkha . ptgh. bhugna- ~ bhugga. pronchati pdjhna. 5 bhumi bhfi. a phani- phan. bhrjjati. bhujj na. bhedra- bhed. r phal. • ph ala- • phalgunar. phaggan. •'.;-. bhramati bliauna. ph&la- . j phala. bhramara bhaur. • bhra?tra bhatth. phulJa-." ' phull. • • bandhati ". bannhana. bhr&tr- bhai. bhru- barkara«- ! bakk°ra. bhau. balivarda- I bahld. ' niakSa macchar. bahutva- bauht. mak?ika makkhi. bahti- bfth. majj& mijjh. _ bahya- * * r bajh. 'Z " mancaka» manja. bindu- bund. manjistha majith.- ^ bind. math a- marhi. • • bite- : bil. manikara- manear. bisa- r bh§(h).. | j matsya- - macch. bi. math r a- - matha.? blja- • budhyate bujjh'na, manthana- madhaui. bubhuksa , bhukkh.. * mantra- mand. bus a- : ' bhoh. manda- - man- br db a- buddha. +ak?a- • • man&kkha. brfthmana- bahman. +kara- m&dari. . bhakta- bhatta. +dhainava mane hm ft. bhagini bbain. mandiman- mann5, bhaggana. manusya- mnns. bhagna- • bhanga bhang.. * ; markata- - makkar. • a • * bhajyate bhajj na* 1 mallati _ mallana. bhatta- • bhatt. mastaka • • • • mattha. • * bhadra- •bhadia- bhala. mahargha- . maihga. • 147 mahisl i.m&ih.' .- mitna. ma ijisa- A. mas. mekhala hamel.? magha- •• magb. megha-- m|h. msnikya- manak. medas- majj&, q. v. - maif- .«' mS. mauktika- • motti. madhya- .u: majh. i mrak?ana- makklian. marga magg, magar. yajnOpavIta- janeaii. margate mang na. yati- jai. margas'ra- magghar. yad&- i«. marttika- ., matti. i yadi- --je. malya- t> mahl. yantra janda. m&sa- m&h. yabhati jaikna. masanta mas&d. yabdha- jaddha. mi t ra mitt. yava- jau. : mi! ati milna. *yavakara- juar. ; mi s ra • missa. ya?ti- - *lattha, q. v.' mittha. yasya- jih- -\ '* mista- • • mukulayati maulna. i y&ti • jana. muk ta- "j • mukkana. yuga+hala- jula. *mukna J • 1 yugma- jug. j»W ^ nrakli a- .muh. I yuka • ju. mukh ar a- mohn. yoktra- tf" • jot. muii j a munj. - y6gya- • -jogga. mundayati . munnna. y6ni- 1 jun. • mulkala- . m5kla. ratta. rakta • mudga- mti ngi. rak?a rakkh. •'*- mutth. mu§ ti- • • ra nga- rang. musala- •• molila. ' raj ju lajj. musta mottha, mo tli.! randa- Tann, randi. • • ! mutra- mut. | ratna- ratti? if muddh. i mu rdb an- • • ras mi- rassi mutya- mull. * rasa- rauh. mpta- m5ea. rajan- rai. mi tti. rSji- rai. mrttika • • • mattha* rajni rani. m^ta- • 1 148 ra jya- W, x^* f M H vaksaskaraj bakhara. rfitri- rat. vaj ra- I bajj. 1 •rindhati 1 rinnh"na. vaaijja- 1 banaj. r uks d- rakkh, 'tree'. vantati bandanak rucyate 1 rucna. . vatsa baccha. 1 rudhyate rujjh°na. vadhu- 1 bahu. ] *rundbati runnhttna. vandhya- * 1 banjh. rusyati 1 russ°na. vamri- barml. ? ruk?a- I rukkha. , varga- bagg. 1 rupya- r uppa. vartaka- 1 batera. • rOdati rQna. vartate 1 batt*na. roman-' 1 rS, r8fi. vartis- ^ bat. ran kma- 1 r5k. vartman- J • *lakkuta- 1 lakkar. vartika- 1 batti. vardhati badd h°na lagyati lagg°na. • • laghii- 1 lanhdda. vardhats 1 badhna. 1 lapghate 1 langhana. .vardhra- 1 baddhi. 1 lajja . iNJ. ! var§a- i barha. •lattha- 1 latth, latthl. varSati barhna. 1 • • labhyate 1 labbh°na. valka- bakk. 1 lamba- 1 lamba. valga 1 D^g. 1 lardayati laddana. valgu- I bagga. lavana- 1 nun. vallabba- balli. 1 • lagayati 1 Janna. valli- I bet 1 labha- laha. vasa- 1 bah. lipyate lippana. vahangika baihgl. 1 limpati 1 Embana. vagura- bair. 1 • Uks a 1 likh. vata- 1 ban. lSkha- r ' lih. vadya- 1 bajja. lotha- I lorha. vadyate bajjana.l # toman- 1 Ifi. vanara- bandar. 1 loha 1 l5ha. vamaua- 1 .bauna. 1 vamsa- rbanjh, bSs. vartta- 1 bat. O I vakra- binga. vardala- baddal. 1 vak?as-l 1 IMbakkhi.l J| j$£§ Iv&la-l |bal.H J 149 vaspa- bliaph. sankha- sangh (ty. viipsati- bih. sata- sau. vikirati bikkharna. Sapatha- sauh. bakhsrna. sabda- sadda. 11 vicchadayati • bachauna. • samba- ., samm. vitasti bitth. sayya. sej, cbej. vitta- bit(t). sarkara sakkar. vidyiit- bijj, bijli. salka- sakk. vidbi- behmata. salya- sail, sella. 4 vinft- bin (ft). •jalyaka- s&hi&g. vimdhate . binnhana. sasa- saha. bshlla. sftnti- sSd. viphala- 9 sarbi. sati • • bahsra. • vibhftaka • vivah&- beab. $iky£- chikka. g viSv&nara- basantaH siksa sikkh viivasa-. basah. sila sil. vi?a- bsh. sita- si. visamyate bisamna. +kala- seal. bittb. sitala- sillha. vis tha ..: . • • sundb. bissarna. s unthi - • visrnarati . • • vfija- . bin. sudbyate su3Jh°na. vlthi- blh{. Sulba- subb. . bir. stiska- sukkb a. vlra- sukka. butt!. vytti- sunna. b a-ddhl t sflnyd- vrddhi- • • gynkhala- sungal. vpScika- biccbu. beb. sr itga- sing. vgdha- sun°na. bebra. sfuSti vgsta- • • • sekhara- sehra. v&ira- (Pkt. vaira-) bair. saimbya- sem. • vairagya- • barag. *sodhi- sub. vyaghr&- - bagh. Sodhani suhni. gsbbate sohna. saknSti "\ sakna. Sakyate J smasana- masan. $anka. r sang. smasrU muccb. HI mass.M ItofrkM M Bfig.| | J I 150 Syamafet- saula. siipha- slh. Sra va na- saun. sincati sinjana. ; $re§thin- seth. siddha*"| siddha. • sidhra. glaghate srauhna. siddhr&-J- sijjhana. * $v6$ura- sauhra. sidhyati* SvaSrtl sass. supta- sutta. Sva sa- sah. surunga sur&g. suvarna-' siuna. ?at- che. • sukard- stir, Salka- chikka. • sucl- sul. ?asti- sattb. • • stitra- sut. sfldaSan- s5lS. sutrayate siitna. sankutati sungarn§. m 9 s6ma+vara-*~ stibar. sajja sajja. saubhaghya- suhag. 6a in j n ft sain. skandba- kannha. sfiktu- sattu. skambha- . khamba. . • sakthin- satthal. stana- than. sankucyate sa ngucc'n a T stabaka- thabbar* satkarayati sakarna. stambha- thammh(ft)^ sattvfi- sat. stoka- thsra. saty£* sacc. sthavira- thera. sant- da. • sand^a- sanghci. sthagha- thab. sandhya* sanjh. sthana- than!. sap&tnf (H.y saut. sthfiman- thSu. sapada- sava. sthali thaii. saputra- saut. slhula- thullha. s apt an satt. sn&ti nhauna. sa pt a tl- s attar. snusS nQh. sambudhyati samajhna*.* • sneha- neii. sambhalayati' sainhalna*^ sphutyate phutt8na. sarpa- sapp. sar§apa- sarhS. sphotayati phorna. salavana- saluna. syala- sala. • sahats saihna* svapati sauna. saipSa- sgjh. svarna- suvarna. sardha- sadh. svamin- sSf. l&l h a ip sa- hans. -Hala- (ha)theli. ha tta- hatt. hastin- hatthi. hadda- hadd. haritaki- harar. harina- hiran. hasya- hassa. haridra- hallidi. huijda- hund, hunn. Uala - hal. hfdaya- hi &. hasta- hatth. » * If m IE LUDHIANI PHONETIC (Thesis approved for the Laurct'Soavnes Prise for Pho>ielics by the University College, London.) Iff tic a t r PREFACE. The Ludhiani Phonetic Reader is very welcome. It will be welcomed especially by those who desire to study the pronuncia tion of this Panjabi dialect. The main body of the work consists of twelve tales which are given in phonetic script with an English translation and a vocabulary of between 600 and 700 words. There is an Introduc tion on the sounds, describing in detail vowels, consonants, assimilation, stress, tones and intonation. Thanks to the employ ment of the alphabet of the International Phonetic Association, it is possible for one who has made a study of that alphabet to get a really good idea of how the language is pronounced. The author is doubly qualified for the task he has under taken. Firstly, all his life he has spoken the dialect which he has here described; and secondly, he has made a prolonged study of Phonetics nnder the lecturers of the University of London, who have assisted him in his investigations and checked his conclusions. A comparison mayprofitably be made between this Reader and my own little volume *'A Panjabi Phonetic Reader" (London University Press), which deals with the dialect of north-east Gujranwala, spoken 60 miles north of Lahore, while Ludhiana, the home of Lodhiani is about 100 miles south-east of Lahore. It is possible to compare the two dialects in their vocabulary, grammar and pronunciation. Dr. Jain has (very wisely in my opinion) retold three of the stories in my book, so that in their case it is possible to compare the narrative almost word by word. To this unpretentious, but practically useful and most in teresting book I wish every success. T. GRAHAME BAILEY, Reader in Hindi and Urdu, University of London. A LUDHI ANlI PHONETIC! READER. 1 I •] INTRODUCTION, j !• Ill 1. This reader describes and records accurately in the International Phonetic Script one type of the pronunciation of Ludhia.ni, the object being to facilitate.its learning by foreigners, and to interest the Panjabi speakers in the study of Panjabi Phonetics in particular. For this purpose a number of texts have been transcribed preceded by brief description of the Ludhiani sounds. 1 M^Hfl^B 1 11 H 1 2. Ludhiani is a dialect of Panjabi spoken at and near the town of Ludhiana. It appreciably differs in grammar and pronunciation from the Wazirabad dialect described in Dr. Bailey's Panjabi Phonetic Reader as can be seen on comparing the texts Nos. 10-12 of this reader with the corresponding ones in Dr. Bailey's Reader. - 3. The pronunciation represented here is that of the author himself analysed under the guidance of Miss Armstrong and Miss Ward, and finally checked by Prof. D. Jones. Where possible the results of this analysis were tested and amplified by kymo- graphic tracings taken under the supervision of Mr. S. Jones. Asfsjnatural with a speech never taught Jin ] schools, but[ on[ the 156 contrary affected so much by education in and contact with alien languages, it was often difficult to decide as to which of the two or three different pronunciations of the same word belonged to the author's native tongue. Where decision could not be made, the alternative pronunciations have been described. Ludhiani Vowels. 4. Taking the difinition of a phoneme as given in the "Pronunciation of Russian"1, Ludhiani has the following vowel- phonemes :— Simple :iIesaoouuA9 n I Diphthong: ea, eo, Ai, Ae> AO, AU, ua. 5. The nasalised forms of all the vowels and diphthongs occur in Ludhiani. 6. As it is.rather difficult to describe in words the exact way in which a vowel is formed, so that the reader may get an accurate idea Of its acoustic value and formation and "thus may be able to pronounce it from the given description, it is found practicable and satisfactory to compare the vowels of a given language with the cardinal ones. The latter are "a set of fixed vowel-sounds having definite^tongue-positions and known acoustic qualities".2 In the accompanying diagram the thick dots represent the highest tongue-positions in the formation of the cardinal vowels, while the circles represent those of the Ludhiani^ vowels. ^•VH^^^^MHMHHHMlMa^hn^v^—M4^«M^i^H»*^^^^p^.^^^ ^ ^^_^^____ -- _ - ^ _ x. By M. V. Trofimov and D. Jones (Cambridge University Pres<) §§ 174-75. *. lb. § 110. Also see §§ 98-111. The cardinal vowels] have been recorded on gramophone discs, e.g., the double-sided record, No. B804 in the catalogue of the Gramophone Qo., 363,1 Oxford Street, London, W. 15/ Diagram illustrating the Positions of the Principal and chief subsidiary members of the Ludhiani vowel phonemes compared with the cardinal vowels. Symbols for subsidiary members are enclosed within brackets. Notes on the Ludhiani Vowels. 7. [i] is slightly more open than the cardinal vowel No. 1, but is a little closer "than the English vowel in 'heed' when the latter is not diphthongised. 8. [!] is the nasalised form of the Ludhiani [i]. 9. [I] lies between the cardinal vowels«: Nos 1 and 2. It is closer and less retracted than the Eng'ish vowei in 'sit\ 10. [i] is the nasalised form of the Ludhiani [i]. 11. [el is a shade lower than the cardinal vowel No. 2. It must be distinguished from the English diphthong in 'day*. 12. [§] is the nasalised form of the Lndhiani [e].. 13. [s] lies between the cardina' vowels Nos. 2 and 3, and occurs as the final element of the diphthong [AS] when medial. 14. [(B)] is a subsidiary member of [s]- phoneme, and occurs i» the diphthong [AS] when final. It is opener than the cardinal 158 vowel No. 3 but closer than the English vowel in 'hat*. Some speakers use this vowel alone where others use the diphthong [Ae]. 15. [§] and [(§)] are the nasalised forms of the Ludhiani [e] and [ (e) ] respectively and are similarly used. 16. [a] is nearer to cardinal vowel No. 5 than to No, 4. It is almost identical with the English vowel in 'calm'. 17. [a] is the nasalised form of the Ludhiani [a], 18. [o] lies between cardinal vowels Nos. 6 and 7, more to wards No. 7; than towards No. 6. It occurs in the diphthong [AO] when not final. 19* [(°)1 is a subsidiary member of the [o-]phoneme and occurs in the diphthong [AO] when final. It is more towards the cardinal vowel No. 6 than towards No. 7. 20. 21. [5] and [(5)] are the nasalised forms of the Ludhiani [o] and [(o)] respectively and are similarly used. 22. [o] is a shade opener than the cardinal vowel No. 7. It must be distinguished from the English diphthong in 'pole'. 23. 1.6] is the nasalised form of the Ludhiani [o]. 24. [u] lies between the cardinal vowels Nos, 7 and 8. It is a little closeri;han the English vowel in 'put'. 25. [ii] is the nasalised form of the Ludhiani [u]. 26. [u] is a shade opener than the cardinal vowel No. 8. It is quite back whereas, the English vowel in 'soon* is somewhat advanced. 27. [u] is the nasalised form of the Ludhiani [u], 28. [A] is intermediate between the English vowel in 'hut' ar,d-/the cardinal vowel No, 5. It occurs in prominent syllables closed by a single or short consonant. 29. [(A)] is a subsidiary member of the [A]-phoneme and is somewhat closer than the principal member. It is almost identical 159 • with the English vowel' in 'hut', and occurs ini stressed open syllables. 30. 31. [A] and [(A)] are the nasalised forms of the Ludhiani [A] and [(A)] respectively and are similarly used. 32. [a] is a little closer than [(A)] and is used in stressed' syllables closed by long consonants and followed by a longopen or a short closed syllable as in ('pafca) 'leafV ('cad:ar) 'sheet'. 33. [(a)] is a subsidiary member of the a-phoneme and is similar to the English sound of a in 'agree \ It is used in unstress- ed syallables. A very short non-syllabic [a] is generally heard after final plosive consonants especially when long. 34. 35. [a] and [(§)] are the nasalised forms of the Ludhiani [a] and [(a)] respectively and are similarly used. The Ludhiani Diphthongs. 36. Ludhiani has a large number of diphthongs. They are distinctly rising and long when occuring in syllables closed by a short or single consonant, and as such are denoted by double length-mark (:). In other positions they are more' like falling or level diphthongs especially when final. The final element of the rising diphthongs is somewhat closer than that of the falling or level ones. Sometimes the rising and falling varieties distinguish words, and in such cases also, the rising one is marked with (:) as in (pea) 'fallen' but (pea:) 'cause to drink', (lea) 'taken'but (lea:) 'bring'. - $37.- In a nasal diphthong it is usually the final element that is nasalised. Sometimes especially in the vicinity of a ^nasal con sonant the whole is nasalised. 38. [ea]. Its initial and final elements! are the same* as the Ludhiani [e] and [a]. \ See $§ 83—84, 160 39. [eci] is the .nasal form of [ea]. 40. [eo] - initial and final elements same as [e] and [o]. 41. [e6] - the nasal form of [eo]. 42. [Ai]. Its initial element is the same as the subsidiary member of the Ludhiani A-phoneme, The finil element is a shade opener than the Ludhiani [i]. 43. [AS] is the nasal form'of [Ai]. 44. [AS] . Its initial element is -the subsidiary member of the •Ludhiani A-phoneme. The final element? is [s] or [(s)] as des- cribedlabove. ^^^^HJBUJI llJHI^HIHIal mMM 45. [A§] is the nasal form of [AS] . 46. [AO]. Its initial element is the .subsidiary-member of tne Ludhiani A-phoneme and the final element [o] or [ (o) ] under con ditions described above. 47. [A5] is the nasal form .of [AO]. 48. [AU.] Its first element is the subsidiary member of the Ludhiani A-phoneme, and the final element a shade opener than the Ludhiani [u]. 49. [AU] is the nasal form of [AU]. 50. [ua]. Its initial and final elements are the same as the Ludhiani vowels [u] and [a]-. [IJ 51. J[ua] is the nasal form of [uti].| [ HHK§ I Ludhi ani 10 onsonants. H52.I In the following chart the Ludhiani consonants have been arranged in such a way that the vertical columns show the place of articulation,jand the horizontal rows the manner of articulation. • A The symbols within brackets represent subsidiary members of phonemes 162 PlOSiVeS. ;; 53. The voiceless unaspirated plosives of Ludhiani [P» t> t, k] are altogether free from aspiration, i.e. they are pro nounced without any insertion of h-sound between their plosion and the following vowel. The voiceless aspirated plosives [ph, th, th, kh], however, are fully aspirated, i. e. a full sound of [h] is inserted between their plosion and the following vowel. The voiced plosives [b, d, 4, g] are more fully yoiced than in English. ..'. 54. [p, ph, b] — the place of articulation as in the English Bilabial plosives. 55. [t, th, d] are dental as in Italian or French. In pro nouncing them the tip of the tongue rests behind the lower teeth, and the blade makes an occlusion of considerable area at the back of the upper teeth. ; 56. [t> th. 4] are commonly formed on the inside of tho teeth ridge further back than the English alveolar plosives. r 57. [k, kh, g] —the place of articulation as in English Velar plosives. 53. Plosives are either fully exploded, or are accompanied by a vocalic off-glide which, especially after long consonants, is often sufficient to be represented by [e]. When however, an un aspirated plosive is followed by another of the same articulation, the first is not exploded, e.g. (kAt gea) but (lAg, gea); (^At ke) but (ruki ke); (be:c ditia) but [be:c, chaqrea] , Affricates. 59. In pronouncing [c, ch, }J the tip of the tongue touches the lower teeth, and the front part being raised is brought into contact with the forepart of the hard palate. At the same time, a part of the tongue-blade touches the back of the teeth ridge. Nasals. | 60. [m] as in English. ] 61. [n.] The chief member of this phoneme is formed by the tip of the tongue against the central part of the teeth-ridge, a little behind the English *n\ Z: The first ^subsidiary member, is, a forward variety :used before dental plosives and articulated at the same places as ;.they. I The second subsidiary member is a back variety used before \y post-alveolar plosives, and articulated at the same place? as thjey. A / J The third bsid member is a palatalised used before [c,;ch, j] •: arid articulated at :the same.place as they. , V 1 Some speakers-palatalise it' so much that -in. their: case bt may" well be represented by 'ji\ : • uj ...". 1 62. [q] as:the sound of ng in English word -King/ Lateral. V — 63. [1] is nearly the same as the clear variety of [1] in 'black*. There is-a subsidiary member used before dental plosives and articulated at the upper teeth. «• • * h Rolled and flapped. 64. -Cr] is rolled sound as in Scotch, or in English singing. It consists of a single tap; at the end of a word, however, it may have more than one tap* -[f ] is always preceded and followed by a small vocalic sound; : -' A-• .... • 65. [£]. In making this sound, the tip of the tongue is curled up considerably behind the teeth-ridge from whence -when released " * • ^B it makes a flap agaiast the ridge; " For the fricative "-variety used as a subsidiary member, see undervFricatives.'? f; Fricatives. ..- . . t • 67. t(o)] is a labio-dental sound with a very slight friction in forming which the inside of the lower lip rightly touches the upper 1 teeth. It is often pronounced "as a weak plosive\b], and is used in place of [b] between vowelsvwheu .coming .in an unprominent syllable. .... -• 68. [(F)] is the corresponding voiceless sound used instead \ ^ v ' <. > y of [pb] under, similar conditions, ," , \\* :j Sometimes the bilabial varieties are used especially before a consonant. .*• • . . * * , " ~ . 164 -69. '" [(6)f resembles English:{th) in 'thin-but is weaker. It is-used instead of [tli][when followed by [d] which then beeomes [5"]."" **• x r ~ •••• " *• ' --•* 70r [(5)] is the corresponding voiced sound s'ubstituted for [Rafter L6]. :'../; • :. • ... i 2 ..';• 1. j 71. \[(x)] resembles Scotch (ch) in 'loch* but is. articulated in a nnre forward place. It is used for [kh] before a consonant. 72. [(fi)] is a sound between [s] and the German consonant in'Ich'. It is substituted for [ch] before [c] and a few other consonants. 73. [S] is nearly the same as in English, 1 ! 74. [(4)] formed considerably behind the teeth-ridge is substituted for [r;] before [n, 1] 01* a dental plosive. 75. [J] resembles [y] in English 'yes' but is more fricative. Initially it is often replaced by [j]. It also occurs as nasal. |,: • 76.:. -M US in English. Between vowels.it becomes partly or fully.voiced. J; ;. . , L=: . „i * :•• •? .Assimilation. The following cases of assimilation are to be found, in • 1 Ludhiani:— .... [\ 77. (1) Regressive assimilation takes place between neigh- bouring unaspirated plosives and affricates: ' : ik gidiaj* > ikgidiar1 • . / peo put did > peo put dia kAd to > kAdto JAb; pea > Mb pea. bAC ja > bAc ja. \( 78. (2) An unvoiced aspirated plosive after a short vowel, if followed by an unaspirated plosive of the same articulation, be comes a kind of fricative resembling [h] followed- by a'short stop of the same articulation e.g. . The sign • means partly voiced, o means devoiced, 165 ••' Ukh ke > Uhk ke '—'•.. • - ' puc:h cuk:ea > puh- pus-? • : - gAth tup: kArke • v r Ath t5 > r AhJ t6 f$| Ath iot'tt > Ahtfettfa. "^&N -: 79.: (3) After a long vowel,", ho wever, the unvoiced aspirated plosive becomes the corresponding fricative v^hen :, foil owed by an 1 unaspirated plosive , e.g. .*/.""< - „ • de:kh ke > de:x ke ? * £ de:kh da > deixda » M * buith da > bu:e»a: (for [d] > [8], see §70.) • 80. (4) If the following^plosive also is aspirated, the aspira tion of the first is lost, e.g.i P. : ' i: ; iv deikh.. kha.. .>. derkkha .1 i-•.. .ioq sAoiph phek:j f> sAp:p phekri; .: ~:j . os .:x L :• ; salth tho^a si > salt thor;a si. , r 81. (5) Au [h] is partially or.ifully voiced.':when a iword beginning with it comes after a vowel, e.g m i u w : " I * ki hoea > kifiaea. - *1 .': 82. (6) A dental plosive followed by a palato-alveolar affricate undergoes regressive-assimilation, e.g. ... edalet ce -a>edalecce o?. ,-.•• kAd Janae > kAJ Jana e :. i kAd caliea si > kAc cal:ea si*IHl»fliiJH : r »,•..• ..•• > -- Stress. * ** 83. There is a feature of Ludhiani pronunciation which closely resembles a weak kind of stress.; It is^ however,\ not *a real force-accent, but a combination, of length-and pitch, sometimes accompanied by .variations ^n vowel-quality. A sy.'lable vthus * ^ affected may be called pseudo-stressed, but for convenience we use 1 " • t * the term'stressed*. >^ -, ««••* *l 1 This does not hold good in the case of the post-alveolar unvoiced aspirated plosive, thus ka:th da; ka:th tut:ea>ka:ht tutrea.,-?a 166 84. The following pairs of words-illustrate this feature of the language. The syllables with -this psentto-stress; are marked with ordinary stress mark precedingithe syllable;: ". 'JiA|;kci J'seasoning' .] tar'ka: 'get (a dish) seasoned*. suta 'attention' Su ta: 'cause to be drawn out'. 'k«Ata. 'thick clouds' kca'ta I ka^a: or kcatca: 'decrease', 'rAla 'mixture* ra'la.".'cause to ba mixed, mix'. *j>Ala 'ladle' pa"a: 'cause to drink 1 ^^ 'sASta 'cheap' sos'ta:'wait (a minute)'. 'phAtkft 'dashing, jerking*.1 phat'ktt: -'cause to; he dashed'. liiP .-'TV • r?/ Length, >• •*• . 85. ^Length is a significant attribute of Ludhiani speech. Four degrees of length are recognisable, viz., very short, short, half-long and long, but in transcription the' long sounds only are marked with [:], others are^ef t unmarked. The'following principles, however, will guide the-student in determining the-length of a sound in any particular word. ,\ /'., /': 86. (1) [i ables closed by a 'short consonant, and in final positions, when stressed as in (biin) 'flute', (da'khct.) 'show'. Iiijopen syllables other than.,the.final stressed ones they are half-long us in (kola)"black*. ^.Before a pause in.an unstressed position, they .are.Joalf-long tending^o long. Before long consonants or groups of•'equivalent length they are short as in (kon:a) 'reed', (Janda>-'going'* They-are seldom short other wise ; but wheh so, their shortness isydenoted by the sign [*-'] placed over them as in (keha) 'said'. r 87. - (2.) - [i, u, A] are short in stressed syllables open* or closed by a short consonant as in (din) 'day', ('pAttt) 'clue\ In-syllables closed by a long consonant or a .group of equivalent. length, [i] and [a] become very short as in (dmda) 'giving.', (dilli) ^Delhi\ So is [u] in unstressed syllables whether open or closed (su'nai) 'relate', (mur'da.r) 'dead', [o] is always very short. I \ Including £, _?.when occurring as monophthongs*. 167 88.^(3) jDiphthongs beliave|ike|[i ejtt o u] as regardsjength. 89.|(4) the beginning of a word. 1 In other positions it may be short, half-long or 1 o n g. fHB vSfS* H 1 90. Distinction must be made between a long and a double consonant. The latter is a little longer than the former, and has an extra impulse on its last part. In transcription a long conso nant is denoted by the length mark [I], and a double consonant by doubling the symbol. When a nasal consonant followed by a plosive behaves like a double consonant it is distinguished^ by adding half-length mark to the nasal where there is nothing else to it. • H 1H HHrF4IH'r VW1 WKt^ti M 1 Thuss SAdda 'inviting'l ft] Msediaj'invitation' hddif. 'discussing* Sidlladj. 'obstinate* bAnda 'being made* bonda 'slave* tanda 'knowing' Janda 'going' dm da 'of the day' dmdd 'giving* hun da 'of now' hunda 'being* bun'dal'weaving' \ { bunda 'ear ornament' Tones. 91. Apart from senteneevintonation Ludhiani has two special 'tones'which distinguish words. Sometimes by combining them •a a ;third special tone is produced. The nature of these tones is practically the same as in the Wazirabad dialect described by Dr. Bailey, except that the .third or combined tone is not so common in Ludhiani1. f - | " ^ J 92. The tones are as follows:^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ J) Low-rising (or briefly low) tone represented by the ] placed before the vowel "begins about a tone above the note which!the sneakerlcan command, rises about two isemi- l JPanjablJPhonetic}Reader,Jl9U, p.|XV. 168 tones1 and sometimes falls again about a tone". There is a considerable feeling of constraiat in the larynx. Syllables with the low-tone are often produced with creaky voice. 1 - , J: 93. (2) High-falling (or-j briefly high) tone represented by the s:gn [A] placedover the vowel is uttered about a fifth (seven semi-tones) above, the first note of the low rising tone. The voice generally falls about a tone from the highest tone'V J * 94. (3) In the combined tone the low rising tone always comes first. 95. The acoustic effect of tones (1) aud (2) is somewhat similar to that of the Chinese Tones Nos. 3 and 4 as spoken by Yuen Ren Chao in Lesson 2 called "Finals in all tones", and recorded in the gramophone disc No. 2— S(93654) of the Columbia Phono- » * graph Company New York2/ The last part of the Chinese third tone rises much higher'than that of the Ludhiani low-rising tone. 96. There are numerous pairs of words which are distin guished by the special tones only, e.g. ;_•.,• average middle pitch low-rising high-falling combined korx^'whip* kgOfai'horse* k6|;a'leper* toea 'pit' * tcOea 'carried* tpea 'touched* [ kaj'of' I lkcai'grass/, kd obi. sing, of Interr. k<.& f ** I T ." "pron. used for 'grass \ * - •,"•'. ',.• Inanimate objects. m& 'mother* m& 'black bean* . - CAr 'hangnail* ccA£ 'fall* CA£ 'rise* "" l/i -In the. Reader Dr. JBiileYi said "four* or five .l-serai-tones" but *•. h$.lV modified it afterwards. .-J31och I jin]; Melanges-^^Vendryes p. 58. *• • * >*- 4 4 * %-* * % 2. Lesson 2 of his "Gramophone Coarse of the Chinese National Language", Commercial Piess, Shanghai, m .**" ,*l Notes on Ludhianrtones. •6 • / ^fc. 97 Syllables ttered with high tone are always ssed while those uttered with low tone may or may not be stressed1, e.g., 'gAda'ass', (maid:)''boatman', (na'khid:) 'mean', (bagli) 'trap'; ('peAra) 'bundle' but;^p«9'rq:);. ^cause "to be filled', (%Attt) 'thick clouds' but (k«o'ta:) vX 'decrease'.. 98. A low-tone syJlable_often .affects its.neighbouring syllable. Thus (PoO'rai) may be pronounced-(poo'&ai) or (po'rcai), (pa'jvai) may be pronounced (p«9rcjai) or (pca'rtti).^v 99.l."In whispered ..speech the distinction, of tones disappears. The .low tone, however, can be detected on account 8 of laryngeal constraint .„ , SZ J |ht» A.UV * * •— •••• •** •v_S '-fcj 1.00 When* a high-tone syllable comes in~an unstressed1 posi tion, especially in the vicinity of ai other high-tone syllable, itloses • its high-pitch to a.great.extent, &\d mayL^eyeu. sound, to be of middle pitch. Thus in (6 kida put: e?) '] (kl-) may lose the high-done if unstressed * • M • J ^ • -^ Intonation \- * * *w **•*'* #r 101 I •o nificant element of speech, in Lu&hi Thus [mm] pronounced in mid-falling ton means high- rising tone expresses 'surprise' and is -used 6f 'I beg your-pardon', in low-faHing-risingl tone it id. of •L *«- challenge, and in high-Tlevel tone it-expresses 'disapproval : 102 J Ludhiani intoriatien has iiotyet been fully "investigated Broadly speaking," th two sentence ""tunes', one falling and the other rreing.- The-fii used where nothing mo implied plain "statements itaining Interr.ogatiye;.words, •• i nd is used' where/something requ commands _j* 'e!c» The more is implied t.e. in incomplete speech, in ques 'yes' or 'no' as their Answer," in*expes~sing surpris' 1. See %% 83-84. • a • • • • *, "r -we'.- - School-'of Gonial Studies London, 2. See Bulletik # v/ Vol. IV j>t. 1, p . 2l£ 4 '"v * % 170 103. Plain Statements: (We are .going to the villag •L V r *• — munc[a hung gea (The^bpy has; just gone.) 104. Owestfiows fie interrogative word tera ki UA5§ mund a • kit:be gea I (What is your^name?) I (Where has the boyfgon6f) •105. Requests and Commands: 4* SATO. kAlem dAj:o j thali ure kAri (Please give me the pen.) (Pass the plate this side.) 106. k Incomplete Statement: o;s Julahe de I do tciJa si I te*ilr.put:|| (of that^weaver there were two daughters | and one s0n||) 107. Questions requiring 'yes* or 'noVa&their-answer: tusj dil:I6 ae A5? tu babu da put*£? (Do'you dome from Delhi?) (Are you*Babuls son?) 108, Surprise-: I ecrha hun pAnjabAjgAe? (Hullo! Is it five o 'clock now t) 171 Additional notes on :the Ludhiani sounds. (Arabic numerals refer to the paragraphs of the Reader). 38a. Some speakers begin > the diphthong [ed] with a higher tongue-position so that in their case it can be transcribed:as ,[Ia]\ In the Gur^nukhl script, the first element is .represented by the same symbol as the short [i] (i.e. I). In rapid, speech' the diph thong may even become [Ja]. 40a. The .remarks about [ea] apply to [eo] also.. 43a. The, olderw. vowel-groups in •, the ..interior., of a ,word which should have phonologicaliy developed into the diphthong [Ai] appear as [AS] . 48a. The samerxemarks as in [Ai] except that the, older voweL groups appear as [AO]. [t 50a. Somer^peakersbegiu the diphthong [ua] with an opener tongue« 1, Compare a similar case in English where the prefix ex-, tho suffix -est etc., may be pronounced with e or I. 2. The native name of the Gurmukhi letter representing [k] is (kek:a) of that reprinting (kh) is (kh»?khO and so on. fill I II ' 111II in HI II f Hi Gurmukhi letters representing ihese sounds is (nan:a) and (nana) pronounced with alveolar [n]. . . -. . .." • ." 't 61 b. Similar is the case with [ji], the Gurmukhi letter being called [JaJla]. '" m: 61c. [p] usually results from [i] ..followed, by [e, a, o, u] when one or both of them is nasalised. ... 62a. [r|] also does not occur initially or doubled. ~ The Gurmukhi letter representing this sound is called [oqgd]. 64a. , Some seakers with" a speech defect use a fricative [t] instead of rolled [r]. " That, however, is considered incorrect. i 64fc. [r] is never doubled, hence the native name of the' ^ • * • • • • • ft > -I - Gurmukhi letter representing this sound is [rara]. 65a. [£] does not occur at the beginning of a word, nor" is it doubled. The name' of the Gurmukhi symbol is (ra£a) or [rafa]. 66b. There is a number of words, however, in which [r] and ft] come together, e.g. (kAr^a)[.'hard', [kAr£ bAr^e] 'black and grey (hair)', (hAr|;a) obi. pi. of (hAr9|;) 'myrobalan' (khArr;a,)* 'rough'book'etc. Some speakers use a retroflex fricative variety [a] instead of [r] which with [£] gives the impression of a long«.[f ]. i;67a. [o] does not occur long or double nor initially and finally excep% in the name of the Gurmukhi symbol for this sound which is [oaoa] or [odoa]. In orthography it is very often represented by the native? symbol for [b] and sometimes . also pronounced so. • r ? 72a. [F, v, o,<8, x] and [&] are not independent phonemes in.j Ludhiani but occur as alternative or subsidiary sounds for [ph. b, th, d, kh] and [c(h)] respectively. • \ 76a. [h] does not occur long or double except in (ohho) 'alas'! The name of the Gurmukhi symbol for this sound is [haha]. in Chief difficulties experienced by English speakers - - in learning Ludhiani and vice versa. 766. English speakers find it difficult to pronounce nasal vowels while Ludhiani speakers often nasalise, English vowels 'in the:viciniiy. of nasal. consonants. : ' * ?6c. English diphthohgs [ei, ou] are pronounced las [e:, o:] by Ludhiani speakers, while Ludhiani [e, o], are pronounced as diphthongs [ei, ou] by English speakers. ... 76d. English speakers fail to make any distinction between the Ludhiani unaspirated and aspirated voiceless plosives and affricates [p, t, t, k» c], whereas the Ludhiarii' speakers do not aspirate the similar English sounds [p, t, k, if]. ; 76e. English speakers do not' distinguish *: between the Ludhiani dental [t, d] and post alveolar [t, ^,] pronouncing them always as alveolar sounds. .'Ludhiani speakers-.pronounce the English alveolar |_t, d] as post alveolar [t, bik:(o)'skin'* 7*0 » >J 'pit 3Q 'b$dy, physique' 4*2 » » un 'weave* 17*0 » I » u'na: 'cause to -betwoven' 8*0 »> » bAg 'run, flow? * 12*0 »> a bAg:(9H'herd' 1G»0 » » 'JAgo 'place'' 12«0 'unti 'nineteen* 4*0 Jag:a 'personal name* *6'0 » » botio 'stone* 6'0 » «» 85e. Examples of the length of other vowels. bi: 'seed- 40*0. hundredths, of a second 'pitlha 'ground, pounded* 12'0 n » say., 'essence' 39;5 u it ma'ji 'respect'* 38JJ i> >* 'sara*' whole/ 2X/.Q >i n 'kana' one-eyed^' - 22*2 ?? *> Trauma * reed,' 11£ ih- rt 'Jajnda*' knowing,/ 31 ',0 n n # 7an(Jai'igQing7 15 0 >? it 'una ' deficient ' 22*0 nt 'i * ' These results :wei;e obtained,, from measurement of a large number, of ; kymograpbia tracings. 175 bAsld'^physician ' 36*0 hundredths ofla<«econd. 'bAsda fpromise [ *22-5*g 1 t> nmK' e)) kAOiq' cowriel shel'll * I 37J01 • 'cAOda ' fourteen ' 2O0 » SMSSU^H >» 'mAedia'flour ' 12-0 I » M^l^^M^M » 'kAOclla ']ornainent]bf cowries ' ll'o J „ M II 85/.ILong vowels should be -distinguished from double vowels which form separate syllables jwith a dimuniendo between, e. g. in (t^ol) 'wash thou ', and (teOo) *wash you', the-total length of the vowels is nearly the same, but in the latter word [oo] form two syllables while in the former_[o] is a single syllable. 89 a. Sometimes when.the word is initial, t!ie initial conso nant is somewhat lengthened, but this lengthening is not signi ficant. I 90 a. ^In long plosives and affricates, the effect of length is produced by holding the stop longer than in short - plosives. In other long consonants the whole sound is held longer. Similar is Hhelcasel with 4ouble consonants fbut \they |receive an {extra impulse oijtheir last part.| Injthe gth of ^the whole is nearly the same jwhen the group behaves as double and when it 'behaves as long. t 90 &. Examples of the length of long and double con sonants :^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ JiddiJ/.' dlscussifig' ^Jdd=29 hundredths oftaf second , i Jid:i|fl^iHobstinate J*'d: =21 ?> m:zwxi!&m a bun*da ' weaving ? [ ju=91, ka=18$3,od=*4*5 bunda' ear-ornament ' I u=6*3, n=16*0, d=50 Jamdd * knowing^ I a:=31, ] n=U, • ASI pin<|9 calle 5 with emphasis OIIJASI **V - - -> x\ v 7 — IBS' v « * » *• - munclQ hune gea 18 jF with emphasis 'on munc^d, *r i^r %b >*- M :> V- * • w — • * • 104a. tera ki nA5l"§p with emphasisjon tera. 1^11 - ••• » - > - - ^"^""s-^^-"-. tera B*5 ki 6 ? Jwith emphasis on n*5. •*^_*. I • '1 ^ • «? -• n > • M J - mun^a - • Jkit ;hej I. g£a ?] with; emphasis on|mun<|a. • ••» wBk •v, » '- J •.__* *• v**** * * % • -» ./ • •* • V- V • * "W. ^ *-F • « 105a J tfcali ure kAril With emphasis}on thali. J 7T *. r ••• -rv- Rhythm. • p fc J _^_\=*_t_J_1^_±L_s V^» ^— l09.BWhenever Mconvenient,|thel stressed! syllables! in-a sentence are so arranged asl to ftoll eachjatherjat Japproxi- mately equal intervals of time] ,- If-^n ^ d permissiblelby grammar, this is effected by changingjthe rde r of words jn_the 9 sentence e.g. iii J tera kL n&5 tera kit $ •?) * • U = V> r~ l# r • • * * thi - ii "V. t I V [ I TEXTS. IT • Page. 1. pArja de pcag. {The Fate of Subjects) — 178 2. khu da ccAg|;a. {Dispute about a Well) — , 180 3. |peo|put dia galia. {{Conversation between\Father \ and Son) 182 4. sArban j pcAgat di kAtha. 1 {Story^of\ Sarban^jthe Bhagai) I 184 5. gidiar, g*dr,i te bagcea:r, di kAtha. \{Story of Jackal Jackaless and Wolf) \ 188 6. rapdjle lAeng an ka gita? {Will You \Take\ Rupees orGiM) -„.. ^^^^^^^^ 190 7. poistia da CAOldri. {The| Headman^of ^Lazy ^^^^Persons) | 1 | J 192 8.1 ji-sA];ea lall. B( T/ie Ruby withba Burnt Heart) __ 196 9. madari bapiu. {A Juggler Father) — — 198 10. bamair rahi di kahani. {Story of a Sick Traveller) 200 11. ccalle dArji di kahani. {Story of a Foolish Tailor) 202 12. lk sahukair te ode kcO|;e. (A Merchant and his j Horses) __ _ ~ — 204 HVOCABULARY M-—M I I—1^^HBL_^BMI—M215 TEXTS. 1. pArja de p«a;g do pcai sell 6na t6 | kuch kharabri ho gAi | e:s Ui sarka:r ne I ona nu | desankala de:tta|! pin^o | pAn che ko ba:t gA6 se | ta sAnja PAS gAi|| SArak de kanqe |! ik ruk:h de:x ke | 6n:a n§ keha I "CAIO | ede hetba ra:t kAt:a leJ:eir* p0u:J§ ror,& te | 6:na nu nl:d na ai| ta gel:a kAran lAg:a PAS|| bAr;e pcai n§ keha | "je mAs raja noma | ta pArja nu bA^a sukh d§a"|| chot:e ne keha | "je mAs raja homa | ta bAr;a dukh dea"|j hon rAb(:aJ de kArne ki hoe | JIS nag:ar'de nere 6 bAefrhe si | ot:he da raja mAr gea | te ode ula:d koi nAisi|| nAgar de lok:a ne | TAI ke sld kit:i DAI 'hat.hi soga:r ke ehA^:a deJ:e | ji nu § Apni gArdan te hatha Uoe | ose nu ap:a raja bena laJ:e'|| jAd hat:hi cha 1. The Fate of Subjects Two brothers \vere[| By them | some mischief was done | for this by Government J they | were transported |l From village | five, six Kos distance | they had gone } then evening^f ell IJ On the side of the road | seeing a tree I they said I "Come | under it let us pass the night"(l On stones on the ground I they did not get sleep | so they began talkingH The elder brother said | "If I were king I then I shall give much comfort to the subjects'^! The younger said | " If I were king J then I shall give much trouble"!! Now as God would do it I the town near which they were sitting | the king thereof died | and he had no offspringl! The people of the town | assembling resolved | "Adorning an elephant, we should let him loose | whomsoever he takes on his neck | we should make him our king"!! When the elephant was let loose | no person of the town | he took on his neck | but when he came near the brothers the younger brother he | took onto his neck([ The people at once I put garlands about his neck | and made him their king [I Now he began to give trouble to the subjects | the subjects War© greatly:harassed {lit. their breath came into the nose) [J After thinking f 180 bAi "eda bA^a pcaie | CAIO 6 de ko:l cal:IJe | ar 5 nu k&J pAi enu" samjcaue | san:u dukh n& dAoe" lokft de kAhe | bA|;a pcai ApnS chot:e pcai ko aea|ardnu kAe:n lag:ea | pAi, "tet:6 pATjabA^i dukhi 2. khu da ccAgj;a kfse a:dmi n§1 Apni gAli: ca khu luaeall sari gAl nu pan! pcAran ? da sukh ho geail kuQCir mAgrol khu oale di Apn§ gamdn^i na:l le^ai ho PA*|| eispar 6 n§ gamdncli nu | pan! p«Arn6 mAnd kAr dit:a | hun gaman^i nu! bAri muskal ho gAi|| e de:xke | 6 ne khu mul IAS lea | ar pAslre malak nu | pan! pcArn6 mAnd kArattall J • hun pAsl:a malak baki:l ko:l gea | ar pucrhea bAi "kime mA§n:u ta khu c6 pan! pcArna mile | or mere gemancji nu na mile"|| baki:l n§ keha | "e ta asa:n gAl: s | daoa kAr de"|| adalat ca baki:l ne" keha | bAi "§ne" khu bec:ea e f'panl ni bec:ea | puni eda e"|| adalat n§ ese t(a)rd phArsla kArattall hun phe:r pAel:e mqlak I 1814 they said | "There ia his elder brother } come, let us go to ;him.| and J 1 ask him | to advise him | not to give us-so much trouble"[[ *• At the peopled request | the elder brother came near hi& younger brother | and began to say to him | uThe subjects are much harassed at your hands. Do not give them so much trdtible"[[ Hearing thts | the younger brother | replied J MTo get trouble indeed^] was in the fate of the subjects \ I had told you even beforehand \ that if I were king | I should give much trouble to the subjects[[ If the subjects had to get comfort J then you, also, were sitting nearby | the elephant would have taken 9 * x you on his neck."l[ 2. Dispute about a Well. Some man | had a well dug (lit. attatched) in his street|[ This afforded facility of drawing water to the whole street[[ After some time a quarrel arose between the owner of the well and his neighbour[[ At this he his neighbour | prevented from drawing water|[ Now the neighbourl| felt a great difficulty|( Seeing this | he purchased the well I and the previous owner | be prevented from drawing water [[ '•'•&..*•: Now the first owner went to a pleader | and asked j "How, indeed can I be allowed to draw water! | and my neighbonr be not allowed to do so?"U The pleader said | "This forsooth is an easy affair | Bring a law-8trit"|[ In court-the pleader, said-^ "He has sold th,e well only \ and notjthe water | water belongs to him"[| The court decided exactly in this way[| Now.,again >the tormer owner j 182 n§ | Apne gaman^i nu khu c5 pani pcAran t5 ro:k dat:a|| hun 5 gam&ncli baki.i ko:l gea | ar keha | bAi "take ta khu e:s Ui mul lea si | bAi eda malak bAn ke | mAs a:p ta pani pcAra ar pAel:e malak nu na pcAran deall mAsn:g rapAj:a bi khArcea ar gAl:a bi na bAni|| mA§ cAona s | pAi kise t(a)ra adalat § phAesla kAre | bAi mAs bi pani p0Ara | ar h bi pcAre"|l baki:l bol:ea | "ac:ha, ed:a i ho JAU | tu daoa kArde"|| adalat ca bakiil ne keha | pAi "je khu de pAel:e malak ne | khu e bec:ea 8 | pan! nAi bec:ea | ta §nu hukam dit:a jaoe | pAi khu cS Apna pani kAq:a lAoe | nAhi ta khu da nAma malak | d AS • rap As ro:j hArja 1AU"|| § sun ke dona n§ soc:ea | bAi khu c6 sara pani kis tra mk:al SAkda s|| akhirr 6n:a n§ rajinama kAr lea | bAi "ap.a dome" pani pcAr lea kArUe [ adalat de phAsisle ta) ese tra hunde rAe:nge"|| * 3. peo put dia gaha peo—mulea:! put:—ha ji|| peo—ure & bib:a|| put:—aea ji | das:o ki k Aerie* 5! peo—tii Aj:a pAr;an gea si? i put:—ji ha | par san:ii chut:i chetu mil*gAi|| peo-ac:ha:!ki sabAb ohetji chut:i mil gAi? / r 183 prevented his neighbour from drawing water from the well \[ Now the neighbour went to the pleader | and said | "I indeed A had bought the well | that becoming its owner | I myself ;may draw water | and may not allow the former owner to do so[[ Although I spent the money | yet the thing did not turn out (i.e. I did not succeed).Jl fciL want | that the court may decide somehow | that I also may draw water | and he too may do so|[ The pleader said j "All right, thus it will be | Bring a suit" (I In court the pleader said | "If the former owner of the well | had sold the well alone | and not the water | then he may be ordered to remove his water from the well | othewise J the new owner of the ^well | will charge ten rupees a day as rent"[[ Hearing this [ they both thought | "How can the whole water be removed from the well?"[j At last they made an agreement J "Let both of us draw water | the decisions of the court indeed | will go on in this very way"H I 3. Conversation between Father and Son. Father—Mula ! Son—Yes sir[[ Father—Come here darling[| Son—Just coming sir. Please tell me J what you want to say[| Father—Did you go to school this morning ? Son—Yes sir | but we were given leave earlier|[ Father—Is it ? I Why were you given leave earlier ? 184 put:—ji sa^ra pdd.a kASda si J pAi Apng ba:ccha de put: jamieaell peo—ha thi:k 81 mA§ sd<|;e pdd:e ne sArbaa pcAgat di JkAtha sunai I phe:r san:u chut:i ho ,gAi|| peo—sArban di kAtha tAen:u kAhi ka lag:i? put:—ji bA^i sonjj peo—ac:ha pher mASoni bi sural! put:—ji hon ta mAs puha geaj peo—phe:r mAe sunarna? put:—tusi suna deo t& canga i kAro, nAhi ta kAl nu saii:u ma:r PAU peo—1A8 phe:r tcea:n na:l sun|| 4. sArban pcAgot di kAtha raja jAsrat da nAo ta sunea i hona e I 6 m candar ji da peo sij| 6 n§ Apni chot:i rani de kAhe ra:mcander lAchman nu cAoda bArsa dd bAnoba:s de:tta par a:p 6n:a de he:rbe ca mAr gea|| niAron lag$e 6 ne* keha, pAi "mXsn:u fk: nkhi ne s(a)ra:p ditui si|| 6 de kArke mAen:u put:a de hAoke nurna pea|| gAl: 185 Son—Sir our teacher savs ! that a son has been born to our kingll Father—Yes you are right I I also had read in a paperfl ? S- \ Well, tell me now what work you did to-da} [ Son—Sir, At first I I read two pages o f my book then solved fiv 6J sums seven verses of Baba Farid were learnt by heart After that our teacher I told us the story of Sarban Bhagat]] Then we were given leaveN Father—How did you find the storv of Sarban ? Son—Sir very interesting (lit. beautiful) II Father—Well then relate it to me alsoll Son—Sir now forsooth I have forgotten l| Father—Then may I relate it? Son—If you relate it I you will do well indeed I for otherwise I shall get a beating to-morrow [[ Father—There now ! Listen with attention 4. Story of Sarban, the Bhagat The name of King Jasrat (Dasaratha) | you must have heard || He was the father of Ramchandar\[ At the instance of his younger queen | t ' * * to Ramchandar and Lachman I an exile for fourteen years he irave ' but himself died of the anguish of separation from them[[ When dying he said tL A sage had cursed me on that account I | have had to die of separation from sonsll 186 e:s t(a)ra hoi|| pichli ju:n ca j mAsnm sakair kheLan da bAfa sA5:k si|| JIS bAn ca mAs | saka:r khe:lda hunda si | ot:he ik: nkhi rAsda si|| 6 ar 6di timi j ak:ha to en:e si|| 6n-.a da ik: put: si | jida nA5 SArban si SArban Apne ma peo di | b*\;i tAe:l kArda si|| hamesa 6n:d nu bAsgi c baha: ke | mob^e cak:i phirda si|| ik: pheri 6n:a ne keha | "sArbana, san:u theu^a pani palasT> > 6n:a nu ik: rukth de hetha batha: ke | SArban nAdi to pan! lAe:n cAlea gea Aediar mAs | ik: hiran de piclhe | pcaj:ea jauda si hiran ne mAsniu ^d. na ditii | chekier, meria ak:ha to 61:e ho geaII JAd SArban ne | pan! pcAran lAi nAdi c Apna kcAru qobiea [\ la mA8n:u gAr;gAr; di avail aili mAs sAmjea pAi hiran boliea s|| ccAt: 6d:ar bain mareall bain sArban di chatii ce lag lea I ar sArban ne kuik mari "IIAS mA§ mAr gea"||e sun ke I mAs* 4 Are a I pAi mera baia ta kise aidmi de legiea|| jAd mAs pais gea | ta dekhiea | pAi e ta kise nkhi da puti s mAs ode pAeia ca ja <\ig pea | ar 6 to Apni pculi bakhsai|j pheir mAsnie odi chain co j bain ka^ieall ta one keha J 'ois rukih de hetha | mere anie ma peo bAstihe en|| mAs 6ma lAi pani lAein aea si|| hun tu | d pani da kcAra lAs'ja||. pAdia onia nu pani pelai | pheir mera hail dasli' || e kAen sair ( SArban de pran nikial gAe|| jAd SArban nu | pani Usin gAs deir ho gAi | er mur 187 The thing happened thusl[ In the last birth | I had a great fancy for huntingH ^u the forest where I | used to go hunting | there lived a sage|[ -He arid his wife | were blind of eyes|[ They had a son | whose name was Sarban[[ To his parents Sarban j used to do a great service[[ Seating them in the slings of a pole he always | carried them on shoulders^ Once they said I '0 Sarban I give us cold water to drink'[[ Seating them under a tree I Sarban went to fetch water from a stream [I On this side I I in punmit of a deer J was ranningN The deer did not allow me to overtake it I and at last became out of my sight|[i When; Sarban I to fill it with water immersed his pot into the stieamj I heard a sound of gurglingH I-thought | the deer had mad a it[[ At once I discharged an arrow in that directionH The arrow struck into SarbanJs chest | and Sarban gave out a cry \ 'Alas I am dead1 [[ Hearing this f I was frightened j that my arrow forsooth | had hit a human being|| When I went near | I saw | that it was. indeed the son of a sage[[ I fell down upon his feet i and had, my fault forgiven by him|[ Thereafter I from his chest |,extracted the arrow[[ Thereupon he said 1 Under that tr^e I my blind parents are sitting[[ I had come to take water for them[[ Now you | take this jar of waterH First let them drink water ( and afterwards inform them of my condition'^ Immediately on saying this | Sarban's life was gonejl When Sarban I to fetch water I had long been away and did not m 188 ke nd aea | ta ode ma peo kAem llagie | "kiI]sabAb?]Aj SArban nu de:r lag:i | sukih houe" | Asn:g ca I mere pAsrS da khA^ka sunke | sAmje [ pAi SArban a gea|| pucihan lagie | Wbana AJ: de:r kJu lag:i?'|| msM cup: reha | or pan! da ketora ag:e kAratta|| 6 bote jAd tai tu e [ ni dAsda|||pAilAj:a I Uemu deirflkJujlioil | ASI panilnAl pinail hua JmA§o:u sara hail! dAsiana ]pea:|)16I taisunan su:r lagle barlaipH karan[ jar bol:e | jpAi 1 'saniu SArban kolJlAe CA1:'|| mAsBonianu | jitihe SArban pea si | lAelaeajl pheir mASoiii kAeia lagie | pAi 'ik: cita bena:'|| jAd mA§ cita banai ta | 6 dome* | sArban nu godii ca lAeke | cita ca bAs gAs J ar mA§n:u keha | pAi "cita nu Ag: la de"|| mAe Ag: la dit:i|||jAlde hoe | 6n:a ne j mAsniu sraip dit:a|Akhe| 'hel papii IJjis trai ASI|| put:I del bAokej mAre a[ esef tra tu bi put:a de hAoke mArg'll so hun e ruimcandar Uchman da|bAuoba:s |jmAsn:u|ma:r jke|chac|:u"|| | j |]l S-Hgidiaj;, gid^i te bagceair, di kAtha. Hkise jan?al|c|| ik:|(|u])giBkhAd:Bsi[|fte|6da muj DA^U si Pcir4 H ode|c|ik|gid:a]; | te|gid];i JrA§de se|| ik:|dm 6n:a|nu ti| lag:i||§gid^i|ne gid:arJnuBkeha!lI"eAlo | nAdi|te , ld:3 bol:ea paaijpiia |ca]:iJ3' |lHg rH ' ("otiheH^ Ibagcea:r rA§da[ e|| J6pa|ap:a[nulkha| lAu"||Jgidri ] boJ:i|]"tfiI phikar nagkAr | mAs!ot:heHAhi| ji^gAlrHbanamagi | jiBte|ap:a 189 come back | then his parents began to^say I 4What is reason ? to-day it has taken Sarban long | may it be well with him} [| In the meantime | hearing the sound of my footsteps | they thought | that Sarban had come J and began to ask I 'Sarban ! | why did it take you so long to-day?' 1 I kept silent I and held out the cup of water before £/iew?[[ They said | 'Until you tell | why you took long to-day A we will not drink water'H Now the whole story I was obliged to tell[| They forsooth immediately on hearing it 1 begen to make lamentations \ and said | 4Take us to SarbanMI I them | where Sarban had been lying J brought|| Then they said to me | 'Make a pyre'[| When I had made the pyre] thev both I taking Sarban into taeir lap | sat on the pyre | and said to me | 4Apply fire^ to the pyre'^ I applied fire to it[[ When burning they | cursed me | saying '0 wicked [I Just as we I have died through separation from our son. I in the like manner may you also | die through separationrfrom your sons'N So now this-exilq of Ramchandar and Lachman | will end in my death"|l 5.—Story of Jackal, Jackaless and Wolf. In a certain jungle I there was a deep den j and its opening was very narrow[[ In it a jackal | and jackaless lived [| One day they felt thirstyH The jackaless said to the jackal | uCome let us go to the stream to drink water"l[ The jackal said | "There, forsooth, lives a wolf I he will indeed devour us"[l The jackaless said | "You need not be afraid | there I shall invent such a story | that wp* may 190 pani bi pi UJie | ar bagoeair, bi apa nu kuch na kAhe"|| e kAe ke | don:6 I pan! pi:n tur PASII jAd 6 bagcea:r. de ne^e pA5c:e | ta gidri boliil "gid:ar;a, mamig nu rfiim ra:m kAr IASII" gidiar kAen lagiea! mera ta ti na:l SAi)g(a) sukiea pea e f bo:l ni hunda"|| gid^i ng keha | "phe:r pani kJu ni pi lA8nda"|| § sun ccAt: gidiar; ng | TAJ: ke pani pi lea ar gidr;i nu keha | "tu bi pani pi lAsJ,||jAd don:6 | pani pi cuk:e | ta gidri bagcgair, nu kAein lagii | "mamia sa^ie do bacie an|| gidiar, kA§da 8 | 'dome mere en* | mA§ kA§ni a | 'domg mere an'|| tu tCAlia ke | saqia phAsisIa kArde"|| bagoeair, ng sociea | bAi gn:a nail ja ke | sarea nu kba 1AU|| g so:c ke | 6n:a de mAgar ho leal I jAdo 6 tin:g | gidiar, di khAq: te ae | ta gidri bolii | "IAS mamia | tli ure khAr, I Asl D9c:e *As aJ:e"|| gidiar; gid^i Apni khAcpca bAr, gA81 bagoeair, bahar khAr;a reha keAj*i:ka mAgro gidr;i ng khAd^ia c6 mu bahar kAqie ke keha] "mamia | Asi ta Apna apie i rajinama kAr lea[| ik: bacia mAs 1A8 lea | ik gidrer, ng|| hoa saniu tetio | phAeisla karAoiu di loir, ni"|| g sun bagdair; sarminde ho ke j Apng kcAr mur; aed. 6. rapajre lAeng an ka gita? ik seith de | tin nAokier si|| jAd daoali de dm I 191 drink water | and^_yet__the (wolf g may |^ not }do£| us J^ny Jharm"U Saying _this J|Jboth|| _set joff( to |d rink [ water U When they reachedUnear __the^wolf | tlief jackalessjsaid "0 Ijackaljj greet (Hi. say^Ram^Ram) Jthe uncie"|[ The jackal replied ] ;*My fl^fl throat forsooth is dry with thirst | I cannotJspeak?,l[|Th0|jackalsss|said[i "Thenjwhyjdo'nt youj drink water?" l[]Hearing this | the jackal at once | drank water to his heart's con- tent and said to the jackaless]| "You also may drink water|[" When]botlJhad drunkHwater | the Wjack ales sM saidMtoMthe wolf | "Uncle, there are two cubs of ours[[ The jackal says ] 4Both are mine' | I say J'Both lareJmine'H^ Coming^ there, (you | makeJour£|decision,|l The H wolf ^|thought |["GoingBwithHL tbem[ lllM-1 shall^H^evour themlaU"!! Thus! thinking] he Mwalk^d I alongBwith them[[ When they all three J camejat |the|denBof |the|jackal|lithe|jackaless§-said[j "Look uncle | youlstand here j we may fetch the cubs"[l The jackal and jackaiess entered into their den | and the wolf remained standing After some time|| the jackaless||{showing her facejout ofgthe| den jsaid "Unclell wefourselvesjforsoothjhave madeja reconciliation [[ (I |have(taken one Mcub jthe^jackaljhas^ltaken JtheJother[j| JNow| from^yoiyBwe do! notBwantlany decision"^ Healing this | and becoming ashamed j the wolf came back to his abode||l I 1 ^^H ^H M I. V:^.l I ;• '-:.•: 6.—Will you take\ Rupees or Gita ? Ascertain banker | had three servants [[ When on|thejday of JDiwali | 192 on:a nu ancilm. de:n lagiea | ta 6n§ pAj pAj rapaJia dial tin: tceria la laJia | ar gebie | ik pot:hi gita di tcAr lAi|| phe:r ik:(a) nAokiar nu bula ke keha | pAi "tAs rapaUe lA8U§ an ] ka gita?0,|| 6 boliea | "ji, mAe pAr^a hoea ta hAs* ni | gita IAS ke ki kAruga? | tusi mAeniu rapaJie de deo"|| se:th DS 6nu rapaJie de:tte|| pheir duj:e nAokiar nu sadiea | ar pucihea | bAi " tAs ki JAena s | rapaJie ka gita?"|| 6 boiled | "ji mA§ pAr,«a hoea ta hA§ | par mAsnu kcAr de fcandea ca j gita pAfan da bell kitihe11 je tusi mAsniu rapaJie dAmo (ta SAO kAra: Aomge"J| 6 ne bi rapaJie le Lie | hun tire nAok:ar nu sAdia ke pucihca | bAi "lA§nu ki lofida 8?"II 6 boliea | "ji meri buqii ma | ro:j thAokar duare | gita sunan jandi e|i ja tusi mA§n:u gita de ded* I ta mAe ma nti | gita kcAre suna dea kAra|| 5 nu thAokar duare jam di khecial na kArni PAU"|| e sun ke | seith ne 6 nu gita pha^a: ditii I ar mAgro pAnj rapaJie bi de:tte11 jAd o:s nAokrar ne | gita khoti | ta ode co | siun§ di mohar (or moir) nik:ali|j e de:x ke | dujie nAokiar sarminde ho gAe 7. poistia da cAoidri. ik raje ne" dekihea | pAi "ho:r ta sare lok:d de | Apne Apne: CAoidn an | par poistia da koi cAoidri nl"|| 193 he wanted to givft them customary presentsl[Then Q£ five rapeea each he made three piles | and in the centr3 J a copy of the Gita | ho- placed|[ Then calling a servant he said ( 'Will you ta&e rupees or! Giija1"\[ He replied J "Sir, I forsooth am not liteiate] what shalli I do with the Gita? J you may please give me# rupees'' || The* banker gave him iupee^|| Then* he called the second- servant I and asked.| aWlnt do jou want to take | rupees or Gita ? ft He replied 1 uSir, indeed* I am literate I but amid domestic affairs I cannot fin 1 time to read Gita[\ If you give mo rupees I tbey will serve a hundred purposes " II He also took rupees)! Now calling the third servant he asked J "What do you want ?" [[ He said [ "Sir my old mother I daily to the temple | goes to hear the Giia rec%led\l If' you gfare me Gita |[then I to m»y> mother shall read out the Gita even at home[| Of going to the temple she will not have to take the trouble'd Hearing this | the banker handed over the Gita to him and later gave him five rupees alsolj When Umt servant |t opened the* Gita | then from it*| camo out a gold mohaj [| Seeing this |-the other sinivants were*ashamed[[ 7.—The Headman of Lazy Persons. A king saw*| that all other . people | had their own headman | but the lazy persons had nonell 194 6 ne hukam ditia I pAi "etina dita de end or endor polslti Apna cAoidri banal ke darbali .1 C3 haiar k Ar an'' poistia re kAtlho kitla are kehon lagie | Akhe 2 u Ale ta Atlh(a) dm pA8 an i cAoidri bar. a Umage hune ki kali 8 »> ese t(a)ra kArde kArde | Atlh(a) dm biit gaell raje ne pheir hukam ditia | pAi "je atlha dm& ca cAoidri nAhi banao^e | ta mAs sAbna nu kAsid kAr.-lAii'' e Atih(9) dm bi | Aeme" i JArj g po te dri na bine a hua raje n§ sa*e poisti kAeid kAr 1A8 ar keha I pAi "jer;a sAb te bAota poisti hAU | ohi cAoidri SAmjea iau )>r. hun sare poisti Apn§ Apn§ hukie | te pcArjg ar qoqiea de pealie | IAS ke | a gA8|| seali da si raahinia | pcuJe phuis bach ke I lambe PAS rAhe | ar hukia p ke p lAg PA8 hun ikia poisti nii jo ai 6qga, [ 6da hukia gir pea | te phuis o a gAi|| liAoli hAoli phuis lagiea iAlan deikh I ho ta sare poisti | utiha ke Idmie ho gA8 I tini poisti bAetlhe rAhe|| doia co iki JMOSL bollea, | "CAIO bAi | apla bi cal:iJe j Agia ta nerd ner;e Addi jandi 8 >> duiia kAsda I "koi a^Ar ni | Aje duirs"|| tijia boliea |" "oe | cupi bi kAro !i thuaDiii galia kArde I ailkas ni Addi" raje ne keha I b^i *% sAb to bAota poisti 8|| Aji(a) to e poistia da cAoidri hoea. >> 1 or dalbair. 2 or banailmage 195 He gave orders | that within eight days ! lazy persons) electing their headman | should present him in the Court Lazy persons had a meeting II All began to say a There are still eight days I wo shall elect our headman there is no hurry now"ll Acting in this way | the eight days were passed [I The king again gave orders I "If you do not elect your headman within* eight days J I shall imprison you all " [| These eight days also | passed without result I The lazy, persons could not elect their headmanN -Now* the king imprisoned all the lazy persons and said | "Whosoever is the laziest of all | will be- regarded as headmaii"[l Now all lazy persons 1 their. pipes | and cups of bhang and poppyheads | taking J came[| Of winter it was the month | Spreading straw on the ground | they lay down | and filling their pipes began to smokeN Now'thai one of the lazy persons felt sleepiness I his pipe fell down I and caught fire[[ The straw began to burn slowly[[ Seeing this J all other lazy persons | rising up got aside[[ Three lazy persons remained *sitting|l One of. them , said rj "Come friends | we also may go | Fire indeed nearer and nearer |-is approach ing"[[ The second said—"There is.no fear I it is yet at a distance"!! The third said "Sirrah, be silent now | when talking, do you | not feel drowsiness.? II The king said | "He is the laziest .of- allj^y jjF^qm ^to-day he has been made the headman of lazy persons"!] 4 196 TH 8J]ji-SA|;ea lail. f I WMIf IT 1 kise kamceair1 nu | ik: pheri lail lab:ea|| 6 n§ kAnc da tuk^a sAmja ke | Apne khotie de gAl latkalttall hun kamcea:r nu | kite f Jmitii JlAein dareo5|pair jana|pea|| dareal dejkaoqe | bepM de::x ke | 6n§ m(e)ldlnu puciheajil pAi "mASniu pair lS&ai ki lA§ga"|| m(o)ld nfi khotie de gAl J Utkada jlall ( sona logleall flongljlkeha | bAi c 'mA§|tet:6l fpAesa| tceliaBkuch| nl|lA6nda|||tii |mA§mu di kAnclda tukj;a de deM|| I kamceair khusHho Igeail CcAl: lull khoil ke | m(a)ld de hAtih phd|;aea|| ogle m(a)ld n§ | lail J Apne I bais nall|bAnia| leall H 1 1 IvM hunjikl bapariBaeall long Idekihea pAi baisT nail ta lail bdQiea|hcea ]Agiada|6|||je|s9ciid [lail hoea |{ta] pAnj sAtij SAOJ rap9J:e[da |hona[ e|||§|soic ]ke ||m(a)ldlnu| pucihea pAi "baisInaill jbenelal hoea ]kAnc • jeha 1 tA§ j beciana f e mAe tA§niu §da mull | iki rapaJia dania §"|l m(a)ld n§ keha j "aho ji"|| rapaJia IAS ke I lail ' baparii de haoalie kHia||bapari ng Apce sehar ja ke | lail di pArahk karai | ta 6 sacii mucii lail nikialea[| bapari ng kapi^e callapeit ke|£5?uikha ca2 rAkiha cfceqiea hun Moislfshar Jde raje nu i IlallHdif loi^I jpAi on§ t&clora pherea | pAi jide jide pd lail hoio|| 6 IAS ke merefkoil aoe|||sare[jAoril bAce|| Apng| Apne[ JailllAef kej 1. lor kcameair, kcamceair,! 2.Hor soduixjca. 197 8. The Ruby with a Burnt Heart A certain potter | once found a raby[[ Thinking it to bo a bit of crystal he | suspended it aboat his donkey's neck[[ Now once the potter | had to go across a river to fetch his clay[| At the bank of trie river | seeing a boat | he asked the boatman "What vfil] you charge for taking Yne across" ?|[ The Doatmail took a fancy for the ruby hanging by tiie donkey's noek[J Hd replied, j "From you I | shall not charge any money {lit. pice or half-pice) | you give me this piece of crystal"|[. The potter was pleased and instantly taking off the ruby | handed it to the boatman[[ Now the boat man tied]the ruby to his bamboo [| ' Now a merchant cameU He sa* that with the bamboo indeed] there seemed a ruby to have been tied [I If really it were a ruby | then it must be worth several {lit* five, seVoo) hundred rup^es^ Thinking .this he asked the boatman I "The crystal-like thing fastened rtn the bamboo | do you want te sell?H I to you its price | a rupee shall give"H The boatman said f "Yes sir"[{ Tstkingvthe rupee f he handed, over the"ruby to the merchant(( The merchant I going to his town | got the ruby examined | Then it truly turned out to b<* a rubyll Wrapping it in cloth | the merchant kept it in a s'afe. tfoW thd kin<* of'that town | at6<*d in need of a ruby(l f*e announced by bent of dVAm | "Whoever has got rubfiefe | should bring tn'em to ni6*|[ All jewellers {lit. their sons) | bringing their rubies | came to the kmg(| 198 raje]ko:ll ae|| |olbapariIbi|aea|i|rajeJiigJsAbde]la:lIdek:he par Jkise] da pail |pasmd InaJ aea||| | phe:r§ bapari J nu | keha bAi^ulbi | Apna llailHJd^ilia" (||g off boliea] j"ji j| pAella mulilkAr IAOH jeBthuaqielpasind an | lAsjlaJio | nAIIna IsAi" raje ng pucihea | "ki mull e?" II 6 boliea | "ji pAnj SAO rap9J:e"H raje ng keha, "aciha | je lail hoea | ta mA§ tAsoiu | pAnj|sAa[rupAs de deaga" || } Isl^H hunl jAd [ bapari ng kapia^a! kholiea[| ta I ki I Ideixda 81 pAi §de c(a) ta | sua di cutki rAe gAi || 6 laglea roin I Akhel^hAe hAsl mere|lalllniil ki hoea"?ll •§ sunlkeF lail gusie nail boliea I AkheB^talroniale I meraBtaf ji SAr/ ke sua ho geav || bapari ng pucihea | "6 krkiara?" lail kXein lagiea | "pAelia mAe k3mceair nu l&biea | 6 ng mAgniu khotie de gAl bAnia ditia || pheir m(a)ld ng lea | ong b5i3 nail bAa lea || 6 te Us iki r3pAs nu mul lea | ar hun a tu mere J sare i pAnj SAD rapAe mulfmaqgea IIJ § deixke j mera ji sAr/dajka rA§da"?||^H 9. jfmadarif bapiu. kise hatmanie da | kupi I munqa j madari daWtamasia dekihanBgAs || BkcArHaf ke | kuri j bolii, | "biraj madari nejta. |,bA|;a jg song j tamasie | kitie ].| kAde [6 ] kapia^e ] hetho if seoLkA(|ia|danda si{| kAde]anairj|]kAdeJkus | tej^kAde^kus 199 That merchant also caine|[__The _Jdng |examinedgthe|-rubiesgof jail i but did not approve ' any^_one^|[ He _jthen_said^_to Jthe^merchant ^You|also[showJme Jyour Jruby'?[| Hej replied i "Si J first settlejthe price[[|If|you] like | it ||you _jnay purchase it [ otherwise not"||JThe king_j*aidj uAll(right§ if it Jwere Jijruby |to jyou[ lf|]shalljpay| five hundred|rupees"[| Now Mwhenlthe (merchantj unwrapped^ theBclotb[| what hegsaw then was j that Jin it indeed | had been left a p'nch of ashes [[ He began|to|laraent |[saying} "Alasj! what has _becom^_ of myjrubyf" ? ([ Hearinglthisl|lthef rubyMsaid angrily |]'*You are!weeping | myWheart forsooth has burnt into ashes"[| The merchant enquired | "How is this ? "•[[ The ruby- said } "First I was found by the potter | he tied me to the neck of his donkey[[ Then the boatman .took me | he fastened me to his bamboo[[ From him you purchased me for a rupee | and now for me | you asked only five hundred rupees as price[[ Seeing this | te/^|^»^|fe'/ie^ 9. A Juggler Father* Of a shopkeeper | the girl and "boy* | went to see the show I of a juggle* [I Coming home | the girl said | "Brother | the iufffiler I forsooth | performed very wonderful tricks | Sometimes from HbeneathJ the ^clothj hog produced an applefl sometimes a pomegranate^ sometimes g one J|thing|| and sometimes another"|| 200 mun^a boliea I "madari n§ ki tamasie kArn§ s |,jer;e tamasie Apna bap :u | hatli^ te bAetiha kArda 6?> > kuri n§ pucihea I "6 kAjie JAS?"|| munqa boliea | "Apni hatli ik pcaacja pea e || je koi | do rupAs se:r da kceo niAngada s | ta bapiu ode co | do rupAe se:r da kceo kAc|;a danda E II je koi | quir; rupAe se:r da menge | ta ose co | #ulr; rupAs se:r da kceo kAqia danda 6 pcame koi keha i kceo mange | bapiu sAb tara da kceo| ose peand3 co | kAdld danda 6 || hun tu dAs: | hAe ka na bapiu da tamas'.a | madari nolo bi sona?" 10. bamair rahi di kahani. kise thAo I kalie makaiu ca I ik: aldmi rAeda si o de ko:l | ik: rahi aea || one rahi nu: pucihea I bAi "tu kitihe caliea £?" II rahi ne keha | "mAs qaikdar ko:l jana e" 11 6 n§ rahi nu rotii pucihi | ar ca:r rotlia ode agie rAkiha ditlid | alp ' kuch saluna lAen cAlea gea II 6 de saluna leAodea leAodea | rahi ne care rotia kha 1AJ:& || 6 pheir ho:r rotlia lAeia gea | ta onle circa) rahi ne sara saluna khaj chateau 6 bacara | can? rotlia rAhk ke | pheir ho:r saluna lAein, gea || jAdo mur, kev aea | ta dek:hea> | pAi e:s hAjrat ne; | e coir rotlia muka 1AJ:& | e:stra kArde kArde | 6 sold rot:ia kha, gea V, In Ludhian! the common word for story is kAtha. 201< The boy replied | "What are the tricks performed by the juggler as compared to those that our father | does sitting at the *shop ?" [| The girl enquired | "Of what kind are they ?,; [[ The boy said | "At our shop | there is lying a, vessel[[ If any one J asks for ghee worth two rupees a seer | then father from it | takes out ghee worth two rupees a seer [[ If any one I asks for ghee worth one and a half rupees a seer | then father even from that | takes out yhee worth one and a half rupees a seer[[ Whatever kind cf ghee one may ask | of all kinds of^ ghee our father | from that very vessel | does take out [| Now tell me ] isn't it that our father's trick | is more wonderful than that of the juggler"?[[ M 10. Story of a Sick Traveller In some place J in a lonely house | there lived a man [[ To him | came a traveller|l He asked the traveller[[ "Where are you going ?"[[ The traveller said | I am going to a doctor"II He then invited the traveller to dinner | and placed four loaves before him | and himself went out to fetch some vegetable (i.e. curry) || Before he returned with vegetable [the traveller had eaten up all the four loaves|[ He then | returned to fetch more loaves | then in the meantime | the traveller ate up the whole vegetable || The poor fellow I placing the four loaves | again went out for more vegetable|[ When he came back | he found] that the knave1 | even these four loaves also I had made away with [[ Acting thus | he ate up sixteen loaves [| a (lit# holy person) rs 202 chekiar, k0 AT oale n§ | khedr/i chA4: dit :Q 11 pheir ode kol6 pucihea | pAi "tu ke^i gate | hakiim ko:l cal:ea §?"U 6n§ keha | "mA§ koi hcujmg di dAoa | lAeia caliea §|| mAinlu pcuk:h bilkul nl lAglodi"!! 6 boliea | "jAd tu raji hoke mur;e | els ra na ai 11. ccal:e dArii di kahani ik: pAfea hoea dArji | kise pinqeca | kAm kAr da hunda sift ik: dm | ode ko:l | o:s pina^a da miJa | ccag:a samAoin aea|| dArji ne dnfi hukia pha^aea pAi do tin: sute la lAue|| pheir keha | "nale hukia pil te nale koi gAl: sunaM|| 6 boliea ] "*khaliFa ji | roAe ik: bAr;i ajAelb gAli | ik kataib ca kAl: pA^i si dil:i (J) 6 mAs katolb megai | te 6 de ca likhea hoea 8 | pAi jida sir chotia | te ddri Iambi hoo3 | 6 ccalia hunda 8 khAbar ni e gAl: SAC: 8 ka ccuth"|| dArii ne kehdf "nd ji | e gAl: ta | koi ni na manian lagiea"|| khAeiri thora cir bAe ke | miJd Apn§ kcAr tur geall hun d/irji socid ca pA8 gea|| 6nu Asal c | eis gAl da bAota phikar si | pAi odi ddri Iambi si | te sir cotia 5 socian lag:ea | pAi "mA§ ki kArd?|| sir td meraj bAfa nAi nd bAnan lagieall hd | iggAl (ik gAl) ho sAkdi 81 ddri kAtar ke mA§ JAra nikii kAr SAkda s|| ese kheail ca | kAenci lebian leg:ea|| 6 kidre nd lebiiif 203 I | At last the owner of the houee | gave up all thought of himjj Then he enquired from • him | "For what reason J are you going to the physician?" (I He replied | "Some medicine of digestion I j am going to get | for I do not have appetite at all|[ He said | "When you come back after recovery | do not pass by this way"|l 11. Story of a Foolish Tailor A literate tailor j in some village J used to do his business(| One day | to ^him | the headman of that village J came to get his shirt sewn[| The tailor handed him the pipe | so that he may have two or three puffs | and then said'j "While you smoke you may also tell me some story"|| He replied | "0 worthy Khalifa | a very strange thing I | read in a book yesterday || I had sent for the book from Delhi | and it is written therein | that whosoever has a small head | and a long beard | is always foolish [I I do not know whether it is true or not"|[ The tailor replied | "No Sir | this thing indeed | no one is going to belie vef,|l Well.| after sitting for a short time | the headman went home[[ Now the tailor was absorbed in thoughts^ In reality he j was much concerned at this | that his beard was long | but head was smallll He thought | "What should I do ? || My head indeed | cannot become bigger|[ Of course one thing is possible | I can make my beard shorter by trimming it"|| In this very thought | he began to look for the scissors|l It could not be found anywhere|J 204 akhiir Akke | lacari na:l | ho:r ala:j soc:ea|| dioa bail ke Apni dd^i de ne|;e leaadall khabie hAllh nail da^il phAr/i | er sajie hAtlh diva|| 6 da mAtlab si | pAi jAroika dd|;i chotii ho jae|| Ag: lagian salr | cheti cheti hAtt&i pXoic gAi|J 6nS Apna hAtta baca leV| ar ddr,i chAcjia dit:i|| sari dd^i JAI gAi|| 6nu bA|;i sAram ai F or kheall kAran lagleall pAi sac:r| muc:l jo kuch 0:3 katalb ca Ijkhea hoea si I bilkul thi:k sill ede ca ki CcUith e I mAs bA|;a ccAliapAna kit:a|| 12. ik: sahukair te 6 de k«o£e. * ambarsAr sAsr c I ik: sahuka:r rAsda si 6 nu kheail PAS gea | pAi "je mAs kcoj;a rakiha | ta lo:k meri bA^i ijiat kAran ge"|| o:s thA5 sail de sa:F|ik: pcari mel:a lAgiada s|| pAslia ta | 6 me!:e c(a) ja ke (or meliejja ke) km:a cir deixda reha | pheir. chekiarl 6 no I ik: soni or tell kcori mul Ui|| TAT\ balio I 6 kali sJd si I te cal:an nu | hAua nalo bi te:i|| dil td 6da bA£a khus si|| ApnS sare janua na:l odi gAl: kArda si I pAi "cAlia I meri kcori de:kh IAS | bdoa soni e"H ik: dm | onu kite | bdnqe jana pea|| sahiis nu sAdia ke | bA|;i tagi:d kit:i (pAi "edi caqgi tara rakihi kAri 11 kise o:pre aidmi nu na ne^e Ao:n dAi" sahiis bolrea | "toba | Jill ma jail s | mAs ' ta thuadie 205 At last being tired j with helplessness | he thought of another remedy(J Lighting a^lamp lie brought it close to his beard [[He seized his beard witl l the left hand | and the'lamp hvith the right liand[[ His object was | that the beard may become a little shorter|| As soon as the beard caught fire (lit. fire began) | it reached quickly upto the hand II He forsooth saved his hand | but let hold of the beard [I The whole of the beard was burnt [I He felt greatly ashamed and began to think j that really | what was written in the book | was quite correctH There is no doubt in it that I have committed a great folly" |[ 12. A Merchant and His Horses In the city of Amritsar J there lived a merchant[| A thought occurred to him | "If I keep a horse | people will respect me very much"[| At that place j every year | a big fair is held [I At first forsooth | going to the fair | he kept looking for a long time | then finally. he J purchased a beautiful and fast mare[[ As to colour | she was dark black j and as to pace I she wis faster even than wind|[ He was indeed pleased at hoart(| To all his friends | he talked of 1le »ri * thus "Come! and see my mare | she is very beautiful" |[ One day | perchance he | had to go on a journey[[ Calling the groom | he enjoined on him | "Guard her very carefully [I Do not allow any stranger to come near' her"|| The groom replied | "Good gracious Sir[| Is it possible that one can harm her J I forsooth 1 20fc — 6 AO:Q tdi | SA5:Q bi ni lagiea" e gAlia sun ke o t nu t jr gea | te tigat IAS ke | (Juc; ca bAe gea ose gaqii d3 nefe | ik: 6da Jair khA^cm!! sal:a:ra kArke puc.han lagiea | pAi amtu sukih call I kitihe cal'.ea 6" O ne keha | ""guirdoale jatia 8 >> o * bolea | "mA§ ta baiirabad jana 8 CAIO pheir kafche bAetihie" 6 ne keha I "mAs ta ag:e bAetlha a" Akhe a e kidier di gAl: sii Aetihe a ke bAe ja"|| khAeir kAe sun ke | 6 nu ose gadii ca batha lea rd o gal:i lAjia PA8 6 da da:st akin an lag :ea pAi '"fcoba, bAi | AT: 'kAl da bAj;a khatia SATUI 8 Jer^a gelid hun sunidid an J saa^: e ma pea de belie I kAdi 11 Al si hundid'' <( keho iAJld geKn koi acArj gAll hoi er'l o ne keha < 'lA8 bAi I mAe tAsniu bilkul nAmi gAl: I sanA5nd e *baliu coir di gAl: td nAi nd suni honi? o td cori Lvi | Aedia mAsahuir ho gea 8 { pAi ki dasid" sahukair ne puclhea I "kistrd di con kArda it 8"?|| 0 ne keha | "chAdiada td kise tard di bi A* S nAhl | pAr bAota :k |i«ag:e kcor,e lA8 ja da s"|| e gAll sun ke I sahukair da td trd nikial gea pucihan lagiea | "kitihe rAsda 8?" o boliea I "fcAr td 6 da *hArar; s | par con sshar ca bi bAoit kArda 8" I sahukair bacare da rAuga pila ho gea kAen lag n men it khArto son! keori, | nAmi kharidii hoi 8 207 Until you return | shall not even go to sleep?,|[ Hearing this thing j he left for j the station j and purchasing a ticket | got into an Inter-class (lit. one and a half)j compartment [I Near that very carriage | there stood a friend of his l| Greeting him | he enquired—"God bless you (lit. with welfare) [ where are you going ?"[l He said ] UI am going to Gujranwala"||* He added! "I forsooth am going to Wazirabad | come then let us sit together"[l He said | "I indeed have taken a seat in a front carriage"[[ 41 What does this mean? | come and take a seat here" [[ In short after some discussion | he made him to sit in that very carriage J[ j On the way they began talking [| His friend said [•"Good gracious, friend | the age of now-a-days is very bad ![ The things' that are heard now | in the time of our parents never happened'* || "What kind of things ? Has anything strange taken place?!! He replied | "Look friend f quite a new thing, to you I | am going to relate U / believe you have not heard the story of Ballu thiefII Have yon? | For theft indeed he J has become so notorious) that I don't know what to say" |[ The merchant asked | " What kind of theft does he commit ?" II He replied | "He does not omit any kind | but a great fancy | he has for stealing cattle and horsesj| Hearing this thing | the merchant was startled (lit. his startledness went out)!! He further asked | "Where does he live?"!! He replied | "His home indeed is at Harar | but he often commits'theft in* the. city itself"[| The poor merchant's^ complexion turned pale l[ He said) "There is a very* beautiful mare Q£ mine | newly boughtI| 208 kidre 6da td tceain na kAre"|| 6de doist n§ keha \k PAi "kArda td; bAota eho i e|| Aea;ia sednd e | pAi onu sarea de utlhan bAetlhan da I pAta rAeda s|| jAd kise ng bdnqe jdnd hunda e j ta bi 6 pAta la landa s|| pheir p^amS dm hooe p«am§ rait | 6 uqiikda e jAd tdi , (jAttdi) nAokiar nd SA5 1 A§ :n 11 pheir cup: capita andar bA];da s | ar rasia khdll ke|| tagie jd (Ja) %oxe nu lAe janda 8|| 6 de do tin satlhi bi an | kise de hAtlh | kise du:r de pmc| to:r dinda s | ar a:p bAetiha I tamasia deixda e"|| sahukair bacara pea tAj;phe | pAr ki kAre? | ^a:g-gs(i:i b ca bAetiha si | te ga$i ng *lahAoir ja ke khA^na si (khAjrad si)|| khAeir Aokiha sukhala | belia lAn gtall *l»hAo:r pAoic ke J ccAti utiar gea|| do kcAnte uqiiknd pea | pheir *ambarsAr jainuali geqii mili|| 6 si lokal | pA5n§ tin ^Anted ca *ambarsAr pA5c:i|| tesan to jakia kitia[| jakieoale nu keha | pAi kco^a dAbia ke natha|| kcAr pA5ic ke | kail nail! dund pcar,a datia j te andar bAfeall bA^ded sair | tabelie bAl nAjar kitii | dekihea pAi khalii e|| hun td khAr,an di bi satiea nd rAhi|| pucihded puchded (pusded) | meluim hoea | pAi iki nAokiar rotli khain gea si|| dujia bAetiha kcor,i di rakihi kArda si|| odi jAra Akih Ug gAi|| bASi jAd Agla nAokiar mur, ke aea | td kAen lagiea | "ufch oe ba marea | k«or/i kitihe e?"|| \ 209 God forbid lest he thinks of her" H His friend saitfj "Thi» is exactly what he often does |[ He is so wise | that about the actions of all he | keeps himself well-informed H When one has to go on a journey | he gets the news even then[| Then be it day or night | he waits till all servants are asleep|[ Then he silently enters in | and unfastening the rope | takes away the cattle or horse(| He has two or three companions also | and through some one | sends it to a distant village | and himself remaining behind | enjoys the fun" [[ The poor merchant became very uneasy | but what could he do? || He was sitting in a mail train | which had to stop at Lahore |[ Well | romehow or other {lit. with difficulty or ease)4, the time t passed [I Reaching Lahore | he at once got down l[ He had to wait two hours | then he caught a train going to Amritsar || That was a local train | and reached Amritsar in two and three quarters of Lours ([ He hired a yakka at the station | and asked the driver to urge on the horsesll Reaching home | with haste | he paid double the fare | and went inside [| Immediately on entering | he looked into the stable | and found that it was empty |[ Now he had not left strength enough to stand even[[ On enquiring he learnt I that one of the servants had gone to take bis meal I the other was watching the mare[[ He fell asleep for a while ([ In short when the first servant came back | he said | "Get up 0 senseless one | where is the* mare? II 210 holr ki dasiand si?|| 6 da koi pAta ni lagiea kin:a cir sahukair | puis kolo bi talais karAoda reha pulasoaled ne kAi aidmia* nu phA^ea bi | pAr kise kol6 cori da pAta nd lagleall kcO^i di cori da I sahukair ne Aeqia gAm kitia | pAi sarea nu jakim ho gea | hun e n§ jJude ji | kAde kflO^i nAi rakihni | ar sacii mucii 6 :n§ Atih dAs bAre rakihi bi nAhilj atlhd dAsa bAred ^mAgro | pheir 6di rakihen di sld hoi|| Asltki 16n§ cit:a kcorxi | *gujratio mul lea I i 6 bi map nAi si|| 6 de c(a) phAgat Aemi kAsar si | m bagli te giilea hoea nAi si|| ta bi 6n§ keba 1 je do tin pheri jorjige | ta [gijla jau jAd 6nu joj;ea I td eistra turea I pAi jani saii um eho kAm: kArda reha s|| sahukair bi kAen lagiea | e td caqga mail theaeall iki dm 6 kise pma; | Apni samii kolo rapaJie lAein gea 11 jandi pheri ta kcOfa thilk gea si | par Aode hoe i khAber ni | 6 nu ki ho gea | ikio pheri mujoir natlhan qAe peal! sahukair n§ | sara joir la ke | bagld khiciid | par k«or,a nd manied akhiir | rd de kende | bagii ulta ditli|| sahukair te sahiis I sir pca:r djg pAe|| jAd onid nu surt ai I djgde tcAede hAoli hAoli | k«Ar pA5lce|| tini athoare | manjed te lambe pAe rAhe|| 6 [kco|;a | kise jAti koil] beicditiall pheir bi iki bari | one* keora mul lea | lall I I 2U I What more could he say? |[ No trace of- her was found | For a long time the merchant | had a search for her made by the police |[ The police even arrested several persons | but from none any clue of the mare | was found[[ Theft of the mare |{the merchant grieved so much I that all became sure | that now during his life time | he will never keep a mare | and truly indeed he did not keep for several \lit. eight, ten) years{[ After • some years | he again thought of keeping one j[ This time | a white horse | he purchased at G-ujrat [[ That too was not bad j| In him there was only this defect I that he had not been trained (lit. accustomed) to draw a trap(| Even then he thought | uIf twice or thrice we yoke him | he will get accustomed,;|[ When he was yoked | he went in such a way | as if his whole life | he had been doing the same thing |[ The merchant also thought | "This is a very good investment" || One day to some village he | went to receive money from a debtor of his(|When going (*.*,on the way there)the horse went quite right | but when returning | one does not know | what became to him | all of a sudden he began to run: headstrong || The merchant | with all his strength | pulled the reins | but the horse did not yield (I At last | at the side of the road | the hdrs* upset the trap|( The merchant and the groom | fell down headlong|[When they recovered consciousness | stumbling and falling | slowly and gradually | they arrived home ([Three weeks they remained confined (lit. lying) to beds |[ This horse | to a Jat | was sold |l Even once again I he purchased a horse | of red 212 rAqdall pAella ta o thilk janda reha I mAgrd akihe HAI si Ugidall 6nu ik: cabdk saoair ko:l p*ejiea | te rapAJie bi bAte khArc kit:e|| 6 de pic:h6 kuch thilk turda rehall pheir 6 nfi rasAoli ho gAi|| ik: ra:t kco^a kharais ca rehall Agle dm jAd sabeir sa:r sohts utihea | ta ki deixda 8 pAi kco^a mArea pea ell e de piclhS | sahukair n§ kcora rakihan | di SA5 khddli L / 213 colour |[ At first he used to go right | but later he did not obey the orders |[ He sent him to a horse-trainer | and spent a lot of moneylJAfter this he (t. e0 horse) went right for some time [[ Then a swelling appeard on him |[ One night the horse remained in a mill(| Next day early in the morning when | the groom; got up j he saw that the horse was dead|| After this | the merchant | took an oath never to keep a horsej| t i I \ •I I m |ii n i VOCABULARY The alphabetical!order of the phonetic symbols 3, A, a, b *, d, 4, e, e, F, g, h, i, i, j, J, k, 1, m, n, p, n, o, p, r, x, s, t, e, t, M u, D, x. The signs [ r*], [e]. [A] and [:] do not affect the order. acArj adj. surprising I Ak: v. i. be tired 9c:ha adj. m. well, interj. all I Ak:h s. /. eye, pi ak:ha right, is it so? Akhe conj. that, saying adalat s. f. Court of justice. A5 V. II pi. are 1 9gta 8. m. front, -e adv. in front Aok:ha adj. m. difficult 9jA8:b adj. strange Aom inf. of a 'come* J akba:r s. m. newspaper* AO :nge v. Fut. Ill pi. they will 9khi:r adv. at last come 9la:j s. m. remedy Apn-a adj. m. own 9mb9rsAr s. m. Amritsar. Asal s. m. reality an v. Ill pi are . -• i Asl pron. (direct) we an:a adv. m. blind Ath adj, eight ana:m s. m. gift, present, prize ana:r s. m. pomegranate a v. t. come andar prep., adv. in, inside d adj. pron. this ar conj. and a :dmi s. m. man asa:n adj. easy ^aea past tense from a 'come* athb(o)ora s. m. week (lit. 8 aho interj . yes days). akh v. t. tell . aoa:j s. f. sound, noise a:kha s. m. saying, advice o3:e {froma\ we may come. Aed'.ar adv. on this^ide. a:lkas s. /. drowsiness Aeq^:a adj. m. so big, so large a:p pron. self; ap:a we Aeme adv. thus, so, in vain Aen:-a adj. m. so much. baca: v. t. save ^^ec adv. in ;the meantime. bac:a s. m. child. A6t:he adv. here bscara adj. m. poor, helpless A6 :tki adv. this time bacha: v. t. spread Ag: s. /. fire J | bagcea:|; s. m. wolf Agla adj. m. first b©g:i s. f. trap, coach AJ: adv. to-day j kAl: adv.Inow-11 baha: v. t, cause to sit, seat. a-days * bdjiraba'.d s.m. Wazlrabad 216 bajo :g 5. m. separation bdba inter j. welldone; adv. ex bakh'sal vJ. cause to be forgiven tremely baki:l -. m. pleader baiccha s. m. king bal:6 prep, from, with, respect ba:g s. f. rein I to bahar a 4v. outside Jbal:u >. m: Ballu, the thief bail v.t. light bama:r adj. sick . bain s. m. arrow ba'na: v. U make bdn^-a s.m. stranger;(journey?) bapari . toi cAk: v. t. lift. daJle v. I pl.'we may give' see CAI: V. i. walk, go, start. de. ccAl:(a)pAna c Al:(a)p(9)na s.m. foolishness de'fcha: v. t. show. c daliil.«. /. argument. 1111 cAoda adj, fourteen. denia I sing,sin a. 'giving'suvine-*' see^de&*>.*>. cAoidri s. m. headman. » dan da pres. pa) t. (from de) giv- CAoha adj. {obi p\) all the four. in cAoiia •/ sing, 'wishing* see cd. j S- i dsrbair 5. m. court. ccAtl adv. at once, \ cd v. t. wish, desire. dorea s. m. river. cabdk-sdoair s. m. trainer* of detia past part, (from de) horses. 0given . CQ'.r adj. four -e {dir. pi.) all deuali s. f. The Diwali festival. four. * dAb: v. t. press. ' ce (c+e) prep, in+even. dAi v. II Sing, 'let thou give'. cetla s. m. memory dAm s. m. breath. -e kAr v. t. commit to memory. dArji s. w. 'tailor. chA(|: v. t. leave. dAS adj. ten -a Obi. pi. chatli s. f. chest, breast, dASl v. t. tell. che adj. six. dADa s. f. medicine. chekier adv. at last,-finally. da perp. of. ? che til adv. soon, quickly, earlier, ddri s. f. beard. . chot'.a adj. m. small; younger, daoa s. m. suit, case. chuf.i s. f. leave. de v. t. give. cir s. m. delay, time. deikh v. t. see. cita s. f. pyre. deir 5. /. delay. citla adj. m. white. desenkala s. m. trasportation, exile, banishment. co prep, from within, from I among. de:tta — de detia. coir s. m. thief; -f s. f. theft. dil s. m. heart, # cuk: v. t. lift; finish. dilli s. f. Delhi. cup! adj. silent with capita adv. dm s. m. day. m. silently. dinda pres. part, {from dej cutki s. f. pinch. giving. ;y c u:th adj. adv. false; s. m. false ditia past. part, {from de) c given. hood. 218 difcd s. m. lamp^ s v.J//,j/, si:ig.\(from hxOJjJart^ do adj. two; -hd obi pi; . [l^Mam. -mS (dir. pi) both, a/so donlo. Ilgebia sim. centre. doist s. m. friend. I ga^li s. f. carriage, train. dukh 5. m. trouble, inconvenience. | Jgalli adv, in talk. | . | dukhi adjJdistressed, troubled. gomanc[i 5. m. neighbourTW dujla adj. m. second, gAl s. m. neck, throat. duna adj. m. double. •* gAl: 5. /. thing, matter, affair.,, duir adj. distant; s. m f gAli s. f. street. H distance. 1 IBH id gAm s. m. sorrow. gArdon 5, /. neck. ^AS v. i. be engaged, begin gA£gA£ s. m. /.gurgling noise. • 220 l.| ka conj. or KAXl s'* /• 24 minutes o kaiadv. about i kAser s. /, defect kahani s. f. story, tale kAtor v. t. cut, trim k&3:e (/ pi. from kAe) we. may kAtha s. /. story, tale ay kAt: v. t. cut kalla adj. adv. m. alone, lonely kAtih 5. m. meeting komcea:r s. m. potter j kd:l s. /. has-fe, hurry koncja s. m. edge, side, bank kala adj. m. black' kaanta s. m. hour kdli 5. /.hurry kap:ar,a s. m. cloth; kaljd s. m. heart ka'ra: v. t. cause to be done ke sign of gerundial participle kataib s. /. book 1. keha adj. inter, m. of what kafcha adj. adv. m. together, kind? united 2. keha past tense of kAe kdtora s. m. metallic cup kceo s. m. clarified butter, ghee kAd adv. inter, whenf kepi pron. inter, (dir. sing.) -e adv. indef. ever, at any time who? which? kAci* v. t. turn out, take out, solve khabla adj. m. left, not right kAe r. t. tell, say *khalipha s. m. (lit. Caliph) -sun ke after persuasion common title for a barber, kAsld s. /. imprisonment tailor etc. kAenci s. t. pair of .scissors kharabli s. f. mischief, fault kAhi (/. of keha) howf, of what kharais s. m. flour-mirf kharild v. t. purchase sort ? khAbar s. f. news k Al: v. t. send jgggjf M^si H r -ni no mews: no one knows kAl: adv., s. yesterday: to- khAcj: s. /. cavern morrow M A fo |J[ I kAm: s. m. work khAeir interj. well! khAr(a)c v. t. spend kAnc s. m. crystal, glass khAra adj. m. good, excellent kAr v. t. do khAf v. i. stand k AT s. m. house adv. at home c klurka s. m. noise kAr otta = kAr datia kha v. t. cat kArke prep, by reason of khalli adj. {empty j 11 MI ^kcA£a s.\m. pot, vessel f£f * 1 I^HI II I221 kheall s. m. thought locari 5. /. helplessness •• • 1 khed^a s. m. pursuit, thought ldgcal v. t. cause' to pass or kheciol s. f. trouble cross khell v. t. play *lahAOCr s. m. Lahore khici v. t. draw, pull laJie I pi. (from Ue) we may kh6ll v. t. open, unfasten take khotlQ s. m. donkey lamba adj. m long khotia adj. m. .bad lapeit v. t. wrap, roll khus adj. pleased l9£di s. f. quarrel khu s.ismJwell lAb: v. t. find, search kidiar adv. inter, in what direc *lAchmon s. m. Lachman, Kama's tion? whither T. brother kikzara adv. inter, how? 1A8 v. t. take; interj. lo! look! kimS adv. iw£er.jhow? —pheir inter j. look! behold km:a anv. how-much? good deal lAgl v. i. attach, begin kise pron, indef. {obi. sing.) I lAi prep, for some I lAmSge / pi. fut. (from LAS) kist(oJra adv. inter, how? ' we shall take kite adv. indef. somewhere, lAqg v. i. pass, go by lAt(o)k v. i. hang once lAoe /// sing, (from IAS) he kitlhe adv. inter, where? may take ki pron. inter, what ? kitla past. part, (from kAr) loll s. m ruby; adj. red Idim \ adv. aside done ldinie/ kJu. advj inter, why? leAOin infinitive frontilea koi pron. indef. (dir.) any one, leal v. t. bring, fetch some likh v. t. write koil prep, near c lolk s. m. people k oj; s. f. mare [ loir; s. f. need kuch, kufi pron. indef. anything lofida pres. pass. part, (from kuf i «. /. girl kus pron. indef. anything loir;) is needed ku:k s. f. cry—mar v. i shriek, lual v. t. cause to be applied, ifcry 1 J II 1 J cause to be dug (well etc.) 222 madari s. m. juggler mucil word used, after sa&I. maga: v. t. send for mu'ka: v. t. finish. mahiuia s. m. month mull s. m. price, majail s. f. strengtht power muncja s. m. boy. 8 is it possible? muif v. i. return. makain s. m. house muskal s. f. difficulty, m(9)'ld: s. m. boatman mu s. m. mouth, face. malulm adj. known -jaoanii adv. by heart (lit. by manjd s. m. bedstead mouth and tongue). me pr on. I -joir adv.(lit, hard-mouthed) mAs pron. emph I (used headstrong. before bi mula 5 m. personal name. mAgar vp rep. after. nagiar 5. m. town. mAgro advl afterwards. j na'tha: v. t. cause to run. mAn: v. t. other nn. and adjj.) ever, bcArnoJrt?)/. pcAran | from indeed ] drawing |(water) pEJ 6 pron. he, that pAr; v. £. read odiar adv. in that direction pAta s. m. trace, clue; know- odu piclhe aii>.]afterjthatl| ledge oe pa i tide | aid i es£iiig\in- pa v. t. put ferior Sirrah pa prep, with, near . ; olltt s. m. screen, cover pddia s. m. teacher olie adv. out of sight, ^hidden pcanc|a s. m. vessel from pca:g«5. m. fate opra adj. m. strange, unknown petti 5. m. ols pron. (obi. sing.) he, ihatj pccUci ob/. 2?/. o/ pcai otlhe adv. there ;':.'.IM;BB'M5 I p all s. f. search p ame \conj. whether pa'la: v. t. cause to drink Pcamo ' par unstressed form of pAr *| paci s. m. water , . . pasmd adj. liked, approved papli 5. m. sinner, wicked pA8 v. i. fall, lie down pair prep. adv. across pAscja s. m. distance, journey c pcair prep, on (in sirp a:r) pAella adj. m. first, former pcar,a 5. m. hire, fare pAslla adv. at first pais prep. adv. near pAEir s. m. foot pea past part, (of pAS) fallen pAesa s. m. pice, farthing pealla s. m. cup pAgat s. m. devotee, saint peo s. m. father pcAi conj. that, so that pha^a: v. t. hand over pXj unstressed form of pAnj pharjld s. m. name of a Muham- pcAj: v. i. run . . madan saint "phiLiadj. fivef f 11 i£l phAs'.sla s. m. decision, division pcArjg s. /.Jan intoxicating|drugfl||phAgat adv.}oaere\j pADlc[v|*4arnv• ~ e phAj; v.{£.{catch,|arrest 1. f pAona adj.m. three! quarters jUphe'.r a / 226 tc€(t:n s. m. attention tt§ 45